Toyota OM42759U
User Manual: Toyota 2009 Toyota RAV4 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 516 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3Interior
features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other
interior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information.
7For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt
instructions for Canadian owners
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Key information
Keys ..................................... 24
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors
Smart key system................. 26
Wireless remote control ....... 38
Side doors ............................ 42
Back door ............................. 46
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats ........................... 49
Rear seats............................ 54
Head restraints..................... 65
Seat belts ............................. 68
Steering wheel ..................... 77
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror.................................. 78
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 80
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows .................... 82
Moon roof ............................. 85
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap .... 88
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system ................................ 92
Theft prevention labels ......... 94
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture ......... 95
SRS airbags ......................... 97
Front passenger occupant
classification system......... 110
Child restraint systems ....... 116
Installing child restraints ..... 120
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle .............. 134
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with smart key
system)............................. 143
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without smart
key system) ...................... 147
Automatic transmission ...... 150
Turn signal lever ................. 153
Parking brake ..................... 154
Horn.................................... 155
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ............ 156
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 159
Trip information display ...... 162
1Before driving
2When driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch.................. 165
Fog light switch ................... 168
Windshield wipers and
washer .............................. 169
Rear window wiper and
washer .............................. 171
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control...................... 172
Rear view monitor
system .............................. 175
Driving assist systems ........ 180
Hill-start assist control......... 187
Downhill assist control
system .............................. 189
Four-wheel drive lock
switch................................ 192
2-5. Driving information
Utility vehicle precautions ... 193
Cargo and luggage ............. 198
Vehicle load limits
................. 204
Winter driving tips ............... 206
Trailer towing ...................... 210
Dinghy towing ..................... 218
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system.............................. 220
Automatic air conditioning
system.............................. 225
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers ......................... 233
Windshield wiper de-icer .... 235
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types ............ 236
Using the radio ................... 239
Using the CD player ........... 245
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs ....................... 252
Optimal use of the audio
system.............................. 259
Using the AUX adapter....... 262
Using the steering wheel
audio switches.................. 263
3-3. Using the hands-free phone
system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone)
features ............................ 266
Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone) ........... 270
Making a phone call ........... 278
Setting a cellular phone...... 284
Security and system
setup ................................ 289
3Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
Using the phone book ........ 292
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 300
• Personal/interior light
main switch ...................... 301
• Personal/interior lights...... 301
• Interior light ...................... 302
• Luggage compartment
light .................................. 302
3-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features....... 304
• Glove box ......................... 305
• Console box ..................... 306
• Overhead console ............ 307
• Cup holders...................... 308
• Bottle holders ................... 309
• Auxiliary box..................... 311
3-6. Other interior features
Sun visors .......................... 312
Vanity mirrors ..................... 313
Clock .................................. 314
Power outlets ..................... 315
Seat heaters....................... 318
Armrest............................... 320
Coat hooks ......................... 321
Floor mat ............................ 322
Luggage compartment
features ............................ 323
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ........... 332
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ............ 335
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements .................... 338
General maintenance ......... 340
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs .......................... 343
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions....................... 344
Hood ................................... 348
Positioning a floor jack........ 350
Engine compartment .......... 352
Tires.................................... 368
Tire inflation pressure
........... 375
Wheels................................ 380
Air conditioning filter ........... 382
Key battery ......................... 384
Checking and replacing
fuses................................. 388
Light bulbs .......................... 400
4Maintenance and care
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ............ 410
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ................................ 411
If you think something
is wrong ............................ 418
Fuel pump shut off
system .............................. 419
Event data recorder ............ 420
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... .......................... 422
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with standard
tires).................................. 434
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with run-flat
tires).................................. 450
If the engine will not start .... 451
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P.................... 453
If you lose your keys ........... 454
If the electronic key does
not operate properly
(vehicles with smart key
system) ............................. 455
If the battery is
discharged ........................ 457
If your vehicle overheats ..... 460
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................. 463
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 466
Fuel information.................. 477
Tire information .................. 480
6-2. Customization
Customizable features........ 491
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize................. 494
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ................ 496
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 497
Abbreviation list........................ 500
Alphabetical index .................... 502
What to do if... .......................... 513
5When trouble arises 6Vehicle specifications
7For owners
Index
7
Tires
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information
P. 368
P. 434
P. 475
P. 480
Back door
P. 46
Rear turn signal lights
P. 153
: If equipped
Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights
P. 165
Rear
window
wiper
P. 169
License plate lights
P. 165
Side doors
P. 42
Rear
window
defogger
P. 233
License
plate light
P. 165
With spare tire
Spare tire
P. 434
Fuel filler door
P. 88
Roof luggage carrier
P. 198
12
Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever
P. 77
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 165
P. 153
P. 168
Windshield wiper and washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer switch
P. 169
P. 171
Fuel filler door opener
P. 88
Emergency flasher
switch
P. 410
Four-wheel drive lock switch
P. 192
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Gauges and meters
P. 156
Audio system
Navigation system *
P. 236
Hood release lever
P. 348
Horn
P. 155
14
B
Cruise control switch
P. 172
“DISP” switch
P. 163
Audio remote control switches ,*
P. 263
Without hands-free phone system
Engine (ignition) switch
(without smart key system)
P. 147
Instrument panel
Pictorial index
With hands-free phone system
Cruise control switch
P. 172
“DISP” switch
P. 163
Audio remote control switches
P. 263
Talk switch
P. 271
Telephone switch
P. 271
15
With an automatic air conditioning system
With a manual air conditioning system
C
Air conditioning system
P. 220
Rear window defogger switch
Outside rear view mirror defogger switch
P. 233
P. 233
Engine (ignition) switch
(with smart key system)
P. 143
Air conditioning system
P. 225
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch
P. 233
Security indicator
P. 92
Security indicator
P. 92
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
18
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear
sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the
sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota
vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that these
parts are not covered by Toyota warranty and that Toyota is not responsible
for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may
cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.
Modification with non-genuine Toyota products may affect performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification
may not be covered under warranty.
19
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle may
affect electronic systems such as the multi-port fuel injection system/sequen-
tial multi-port fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake
system, SRS airbag system or seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to
check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instruc-
tions regarding installation.
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-
trol batteries.
20
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
21
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause death or injury to people if
the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or
its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must
or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota
and its equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do
not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
22
Before driving 1
23
1-1. Key information
Keys ................................... 24
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Smart key system .............. 26
Wireless remote control ..... 38
Side doors.......................... 42
Back door........................... 46
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel)
Front seats ......................... 49
Rear seats.......................... 54
Head restraints................... 65
Seat belts ........................... 68
Steering wheel ................... 77
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror ............................... 78
Outside rear view mirrors... 80
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows .................. 82
Moon roof........................... 85
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap ................................... 88
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system ............................. 92
Theft prevention labels
(U.S.A.) ............................ 94
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture....... 95
SRS airbags....................... 97
Front passenger occupant
classification system ...... 110
Child restraint systems..... 116
Installing child
restraints ........................ 120
24
1-1. Key information
Keys
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the
mechanical key. (P. 455)
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key system
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 38)
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles with smart key system
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key
system (P. 26)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 38)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
25
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
■When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 305)
Vehicles without smart key system: Carry the master key for your own use
and leave the valet key only with the attendant.
Vehicles with smart key system: Remove the mechanical key for your own
use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using
the key number plate. (P. 454)
■When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are
not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to
emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
●Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high tempera-
tures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
●Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any mate-
rial that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
●Do not disassemble the key.
26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Smart key system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 2 7 )
Locks and unlocks the back door (P. 27)
Starts the engine (P. 143)
: If equipped
27
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
Unlocking and locking the doors and back door (front and back
door handles only)
Grip the handle to unlock the
doors.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
Press the lock button to lock the
doors.
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna outside the luggage
compartment
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
either of the outside front
door handles and back door.
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations,
the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart key system and wireless remote control from
operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 455)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication devices
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic
object
●When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
●When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following
devices that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key
• A wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computer
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects is attached to the
rear window
■Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold
or for approximately 5 seconds while pushing
on the key.
STEP
1
STEP
2
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at
least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
■Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to pre-
vent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
●When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more
●When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of
the vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
●The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock button.
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control func-
tion. (P. 38)
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 455)
Mode Unlocking doors Beep
Driver’s door
unlocking mode
Hold the driver's door han-
dle to unlock only the
driver's door. Exterior: Beeps three
times
Interior: Pings once
Hold the front passenger’s
door handle to unlock all
doors
All doors unlocking
mode
Hold either front and back
door handle to unlock all
doors
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted
even if the electronic key is not used.) If the smart key system or the
wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when
necessary. (P. 384)
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
■To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not func-
tion.)
■Note for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor, in
the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP”
switch modes are changed.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to
start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically
be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened
and closed.)
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2
m) of the vehicle.
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights are
used to prevent the theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from errone-
ous operation.
●When any warning lights come on:
Take appropriate measures in response to which warning light comes on.
(P. 422)
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
●When an alarm sounds:
Take appropriate measures according to the following table.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
2 seconds
Tried to lock the doors
using the entry function
while the electronic key is
still inside the passenger
compartment.
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
passenger compart-
ment and lock the
doors again.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
60 seconds
Tried to exit the vehicle
with the electronic key and
lock the doors without first
turning the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF.
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the
doors again.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds
Tried to lock the vehicle
using the entry function
while a door is open.
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
Tried to open the door and
exit the vehicle without
shifting the shift lever to P.
Shift the shift lever to
P.
Interior alarm
beeps repeatedly
Switched to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver's
door is open. (Opened the
driver's door when the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in ACCESSORY
mode.)
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver's door.
Turned the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF
while the driver's door is
open.
Close the driver's
door.
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■If the smart key system does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 455)
●Starting the engine. (P. 455)
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 384
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior and exte-
rior alarms sound
continuously.
Tried to close the driver’s
door after carrying the key
outside the vehicle with the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch in IGNITION ON or
ACCESSORY mode and
without the shift lever
being in P.
Shift the shift lever to
P, turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door again.
Interior alarm
beeps once.
The electronic key has a
low battery.
Replace the electronic
key battery.
Tried to start the engine
without the electronic key
being present, or when the
electronic key was not
functioning normally.
Start the engine with
the electronic key
present.
Interior alarm
beeps once and
exterior alarm
sounds 3 times.
Tried to close the driver’s
door after carrying the key
outside the vehicle without
turning the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF.
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver’s door again.
An occupant carried the
electronic key outside the
vehicle and closed the
door when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch was
in IGNITION ON or
ACCESSORY mode.
Bring the electronic
key back into the vehi-
cle.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
It is possible to deactivate the smart key system etc.
(Customizable features P. 491)
■Certification for the smart key system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-2
FCC ID: HYQ14AAB
FCC ID: HYQ13BZS
FCC ID: HYQ14ABK
FCC ID: HYQ13CZA
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from smart key system antennas. (P. 28) The radio waves may
affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can
be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of
radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your
doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
●User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Wireless remote control
■Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked:
Twice)
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle from outside the vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key system
Locks all doors
Pushing and holding:
Sounds alarm
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing
the button again within 3
seconds unlocks the other
doors.
Vehicles with smart key system
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing
the button again within 3
seconds unlocks the other
doors.
Pushing and holding:
Sounds alarm
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Panic mode
Vehicles without smart key system
Vehicles with smart key system
■Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously if an attempt to
lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the
vehicle once more.
■Key battery depletion
Vehicles without smart key system
The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted
even if the key is not used.) If the wireless remote control function does not
operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary.
(P. 384)
Vehicles with smart key system
P. 384
When is pushed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound for
about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights
will flash to deter any person from trying
to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the
wireless remote control.
When is pushed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound for
about 60 seconds and the vehicle lights
will flash to deter any person from trying
to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the
wireless remote control.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■If the wireless remote control does not operate
Vehicles without smart key system
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the key. (P. 42)
Vehicles with smart key system
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 455)
●Starting the engine. (P. 143)
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations.
●Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio waves
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication devices
●When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
●When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic
object
●When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
●When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as
a personal computer
Vehicles with smart key system
P. 30
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control) can be changed. (Customizable fea-
tures P. 491)
41
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles without smart key
system)
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ12BBY
FCC ID: HYQ13BBZ
FCC ID: HYQ12BDC
FCC ID: HYQ13BDC
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
■Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles with smart key sys-
tem)
P. 36
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
■Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)
P. 26
■Wireless remote control
P. 38
■Key
Vehicles without smart key system
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Turning the key unlocks the
driver's door. Turning the key
again within 3 seconds unlocks
the other doors.
Vehicles with smart key system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (P. 455)
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
■Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
Pulling the door handle can
open the front door even if the
lock button is in the lock posi-
tion.
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Locking the front doors from the outside without the wireless
remote control or key
Move the inside door lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
Rear door child-protector locks
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the child-
protector lock is set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
STEP
1
STEP
2
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■When all the doors are locked with the entry function (vehicles with
smart key system), wireless remote control or key
The doors cannot be unlocked with the door lock switch.
The door lock switch can be reset by unlocking all the doors with the entry
function (vehicles with smart key system), wireless remote control or key.
■The doors cannot be locked when
Vehicles without smart key system
The key is in the engine switch and either front door is open.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected
correctly and the door may be locked.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. door unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable fea-
tures P. 491)
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock the doors.
●Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, the doors may be opened even if
the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
●Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Back door
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control) can be changed. (Customizable fea-
tures P. 491)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
●Keep the back door closed while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If
the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,
causing an accident.
●Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden
braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
The back door can be opened using the back door handle. The back
door can be locked and unlocked using the wireless remote control,
entry function (vehicles with smart key system) or door lock switch.
■Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)
P. 27
■Wireless remote control
P. 38
■Door lock switch
P. 43
47
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Caution while parking
If the open back door hides the stop, tail or rear turn signal lights, other road
users must be warned of the presence of your vehicle by a warning triangle
or other device.
■When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could
overheat.
●Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.
■Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
●When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure
the surrounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or close.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
●Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door. Such additional weight on the back door may cause the back door to
fall closed again after it is opened.
●The back door may close if it is not
opened fully. It is more difficult to open
or close the back door on an incline
than on a level surface, so beware of
the back door unexpectedly opening or
closing by itself. Make sure that the
back door is fully open and secure
before using the luggage compartment.
●When closing the back door, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
●When closing the back door, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface.
49
1
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Manual seat
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
50
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power seat (driver’s side only)
Seat position adjustment
switch
Seatback angle adjustment
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle
adjustment switch
Vertical height adjustment
switch
Seat lumbar support adjust-
ment switch
51
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Flattening front seatbacks
The front seats can be moved into a flat seat arrangement.
Manual seat
Slide the second seats as far back as possible. (P. 54)
Remove the front head restraint. (P. 6 5 )
Slide the front seat further for-
ward than the front-most lock
position.
Pull the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever up to unlock and push
down the seatback.
After returning the seat to its origi-
nal position, be certain to replace
the head restraint.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Power seat
Slide the second seats as far back as possible. (P. 54)
Remove the front head restraint. (P. 65 )
Push the seat position adjusting
switch forward to slide the seat
to the front-most position.
Move the seatback angle adjust-
ing switch backward to flatten
the seatback.
After returning the seat to its origi-
nal position, be certain to replace
the head restraint.
Active head restraints
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback
during a rear-end collision, the
head restraint moves slightly for-
ward and upward to help reduce
the risk of whiplash on the seat
occupant.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to
move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head
restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
●Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
●Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion
to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
●Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is
locked in position.
Inner
structure
During
rear-end
collision
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
■Second seats
Vehicles with third seat
Seat position adjustment
levers
Seatback angle adjustment
levers
When a person sits in the sec-
ond center position, align all
seatbacks at the same angle.
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Vehicles without third seat
Seat position adjustment
levers
Seatback angle adjustment
levers
When a person sits in the sec-
ond center position, align all
seatbacks at the same angle.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Moving a second seats for third seats entry (vehicles with third seats)
■Getting in the vehicle (right side only)
Pull the lever forward and fold
down the seatback. The seat will
slide forward.
After passengers are in, lift up the
seatback and return the seat to
the original position.
■Third seats (if equipped)
The third seats do not have a
seat adjustment function.
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Folding second seats
Folding down the second seats will enlarge the luggage compart-
ment.
■Before folding the second seats
Stow the second center seat belt. (P. 70)
Make sure the outside seat belt
passes through the hanger when
folding the second seat.
This prevents the shoulder belt
from being damaged.
Stow the second seat belt buck-
les.
Lower the head restraint to the lowest position. (P. 65)
Raise the armrest until it locks. (P. 320)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Folding second seats
Slide the second seats as far back as possible. (P. 54)
From inside
Pull down the seatback angle
adjustment lever and fold down
the seatback.
From outside (vehicles without third seats)
Open the back door and pull the
lock release lever to fold down
the second seat.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
2
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Stowing third seats (vehicles with third seats)
■Before stowing the third seats
Stow the third seat belt buckles.
Pass the seat belts through the
seat belt hangers.
This prevents the shoulder belt
from being damaged.
Lower the head restraint to the lowest position. (P. 65)
Pull the seatback lock release
strap to fold down the seatback.
Make sure it is locked securely.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Stowing third seats
Pull and hold the seat lock
release strap and lift up the seat
rearward and then push the seat
down.
Push the seat on the front side
against the floor and push the
seat on rear side against the
floor.
Make sure it is locked securely.
STEP
1
STEP
2
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Returning third seats
Pull the seat lock release strap,
lift the seat up and move the seat
forward. Lock the seat into place.
Make sure it is locked securely.
Pull the seatback lock release
strap and raise the seatback.
If the seat does not lift up when
the seat lock release strap is
pulled, lock the seatback again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injuries.
●The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal or rear collision
when the driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.
If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt.
●Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
●Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as the seat may unex-
pectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger or luggage.
●Do not put objects under the seats.
Otherwise, the objects may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or
unexpectedly push up the seat position adjustment lever and the seat may
suddenly move, causing the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.
●Adjust both seat cushions to the same position and align all seatbacks at
the same angle when a person sits in the rear center position.
Otherwise, the person cannot wear the seat belt properly and this may
cause death or serious injuries in a collision.
63
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■When folding second seats
●Do not fold the second seatback when passengers sit or luggage is placed
on the seat.
●Do not allow passengers to ride on the folded seat or in the luggage com-
partment while driving.
●Make sure that no passengers or luggage are on the rear seats.
●Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.
■When stowing third seats
●Make sure that no passenger or luggage are on the seats. Then, hold the
seat and slowly move it.
Otherwise, people may be injured or luggage may be damaged if the seat
hits them.
●Make sure the seat is securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on
the top of the seatback or by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cush-
ion.
Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.
●Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback and are
arranged in their proper position ready for use.
●Do not stow or return the seats when you are inside the vehicle in order to
prevent pinching your hands or feet in the seat.
Be sure to stow and return the seats from outside the vehicle.
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■After adjusting a seat
●After adjusting the seat position, try sliding it forward and backward to
make sure it is locked in position.
●After adjusting the seatback, push your body adjust the seatback to make
sure it is locked in position.
●Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback and are
arranged in their proper position and are ready for use.
NOTICE
■Before folding the seats
To prevent damage to the seat belt buckles, stow them before folding the
seatback.
65
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Second seats
Third seats (if equipped)
Lock release button
Lock release buttons
Lock
release
button
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Removing the head restraints
Except second center seat
Second center seat
■Installing the head restraints
Except second center seat
Pull the head restraint up while pushing
the lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down while press-
ing the lock release button.
67
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Second center seat
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
■Correct use of the seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
●Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
■Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle
until a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
69
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Second center seat belt
The second center seat belt is a 3-point type restraint with 2 buckles.
Both seat belt buckles must be correctly located and securely latched
for proper operation.
Make sure that the buckle is
securely latched ready for use of
the center seat belt.
Matches the tab with hook
end.
Matches the tab with round
end.
■Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Down
Up
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed.
70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Releasing method
The second center seat belt can be completely released only when
necessary such as when folding down the second seats.
Insert the key into the hole on
the center seat belt buckle to
release the tab (with hook end),
and allow the belt to retract.
Stow the seat belt tabs in the
cover located on the roof as
shown.
STEP
1
STEP
2
71
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioner may not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (P. 120)
72
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■When not using the rear seat belts
Second seats
Third seats
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 68)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus
could suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
Pass the outer seat belts through the seat
belt hangers and secure the seat belt
plates to prevent the shoulder belts from
being damaged.
Pass the seat belts through the seat belt
hangers to prevent the shoulder belts
from being damaged.
73
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 116)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat
belt, follow the instructions on P. 68 regarding seat belt usage.
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
■Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
74
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seat-
ing position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or an accident. (P. 69)
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
75
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly resulting in death or serious injury.
■When using the second center seat belt
Do not use the second center seat belt
with either buckle released.
Fastening only one of the buckles may
result in death or serious injury in case of
sudden braking or a collision.
76
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
77
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Steering wheel
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
■After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and
press the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
78
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
using the following functions.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of
vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned ON.
Vehicles without smart key
system:
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key sys-
tem:
The mirror will revert to the
automatic mode each time the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
79
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
80
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Vehicles without smart key system
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the engine
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Select a mirror to adjust.
Left
Right
Adjust the mirror.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
81
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Folding back the mirrors
Push backward to fold the mir-
rors.
■When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 233)
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
82
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing (driver’s
window only)*
Opening
One-touch opening (driver’s
window only)*
*: Pressing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop win-
dow travel partway.
83
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Operating the power windows after turning the engine off (front win-
dows only)
Vehicles without smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, how-
ever, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,
window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■When the battery is disconnected
The power windows must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.
(Initialize each window with the respective switches.)
Open the window fully.
Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and holding it for 1
second.
STEP
1
STEP
2
84
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
■Jam protection function (driver’s window only)
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
85
1
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Before driving
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up
and down.
■Opening and closing
Open
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully opened posi-
tion.
Press the switch again to fully
open.
Close
Press either side of the switch
to stop the moon roof partway.
■Tilting up and down
Tilt up
Tilt down
Press either side of the switch
to stop the moon roof partway.
: If equipped
86
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■The moon roof can be operated when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
Vehicles without smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, how-
ever, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing
or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■If the moon roof cannot be closed
If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically, such as when the jam pro-
tection function activates accidentally due to a malfunction, press and hold
the “TILT UP” side of the switch until the moon roof slide closed completely.
■To reduce wind noise
Drive with the moon roof opened to a position that is slightly before the fully
open position as driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind
noise.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■Opening the moon roof by small degrees
Quickly press and release the switch.
87
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■When the battery is disconnected
The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.
Press and hold the “TILT UP” side of the switch until the moon roof tilts up
completely.
CAUTION
■Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-
ies in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
88
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and ensure that
all the doors and windows are closed.
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that
all the doors and windows are closed.
■Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull up the fuel filler door
opener.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP
1
STEP
2
89
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank
cap, turn it until a clicking sound
is heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP
3
■Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or
higher)
■Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 15.9 gal. (60 L, 13.2 Imp. gal.)
90
1-5. Refueling
CAUTION
■Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static
electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel
vapors to ignite.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.
In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause
injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
91
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's
painted surface.
92
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key
system: The indicator light
flashes after the key has been
removed from the engine
switch to indicate that the sys-
tem is operating.
Vehicles with smart key sys-
tem: The indicator light flashes
after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
OFF to indicate that the sys-
tem is operating.
93
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●If the key is in contact with a metallic object
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
●For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
Vehicles without smart key system
FCC ID: MOZRI-20BTY
FCC ID: MOZRI-21BTY
Vehicles with smart key system
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
●For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complied with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the key
Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any
unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of
the system cannot be guaranteed.
94
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to
the vehicle to reduce vehicle
theft by facilitating the tracing
and recovery of parts from sto-
len vehicles. Do not remove
under penalty of law.
95
1
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 4 9 )
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 49)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 77)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 65)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 68)
96
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■While driving
●Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
■Adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
97
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
Front airbags
Driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components.
Side and curtain shield airbags (if equipped)
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
Curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats.
98
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sys-
tem controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front pas-
senger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat's position
sensor etc. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front
passenger occupant classification sensor etc.
Curtain shield airbags (if
equipped)
Side airbags (if equipped)
Front passenger airbag
Side and curtain shield air-
bag sensors (if equipped)
Front airbag sensors
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Curtain shield airbag sen-
sors (if equipped)
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat position sen-
sor
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
99
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The
airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag
sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag sys-
tem triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators
quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion
of the occupants.
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors (if equipped), curtain shield
airbag sensors (if equipped), driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, “AIR BAG
ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights, front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring
and power sources. (P. 423)
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof
side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be
hot.
●The windshield may crack.
100
1-7. Safety information
■SRS airbag deployment conditions
Front airbags
●The front SRS airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to a 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or
deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.
a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the
bed of a truck, etc.).
●It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the
vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front air-
bags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
●The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger
sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag
may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even
if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 110)
Side airbags (if equipped)
●The SRS side airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact
force produced by a 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle
cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at a speed
of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
●The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag
on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the
seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 110)
Curtain shield airbags (if equipped)
The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the
impact force produced by a 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehi-
cle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at a speed
of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]) or when the vehicle rolls over.
101
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
The SRS curtain shield airbags (if equipped) may also deploy under the situ-
ation shown in the illustration.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS front airbags
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes suffi-
cient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front air-
bags may occur.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or vehicle falling
●The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
●The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
102
1-7. Safety information
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS side airbags and cur-
tain shield airbags (if equipped)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a colli-
sion to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed side collision.
The SRS curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the
vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if
it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
●Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger com-
partment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the front
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
●Collision from the front
●Collision from the rear
●Pitching end over end
103
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Do
not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Toyota dealer.
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
●Vehicles with side airbags and curtain
shield airbags: A portion of a door is
damaged or deformed, or the vehicle
was involved in an accident that was
not severe enough to cause the SRS
side airbags and curtain shield airbags
to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
●Vehicles with side airbags: The surface
of the seats with the side airbag is
scratched, cracked or otherwise dam-
aged.
●Vehicles with curtain shield airbags:
The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked or other-
wise damaged.
104
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim-
ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of
your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.
105
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children. (P. 116)
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle
but the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's air-
bag system will judge that the driver is
wearing the seat belt even though the
seat belt has not been connected. In
this case, the driver's airbag may not
activate correctly in a collision, resulting
in death or serious injury in the event of
collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt
with the seat belt extender.
106
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not drive the vehicle while the driver
or passenger has items resting on their
knees.
●Vehicles with side airbags and curtain
shield airbags: Do not lean against the
door, the roof side rail or the front, side
and rear pillars.
●Vehicles with side airbags and curtain
shield airbags: Do not allow anyone to
kneel on the passenger seat toward the
door or put their head or hands outside
the vehicle.
107
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Vehicles with side airbags: Do not use seat accessories which cover the
parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with infla-
tion of the airbags.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components (P. 98).
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board or steering wheel pad.
These items can become projectiles
when SRS driver and front passenger
airbags deploy.
●Vehicles with side airbags and curtain
shield airbags: Do not attach anything
to areas such as the door, windshield
glass, side door glass, front and rear
pillars or roof side rail garnish.
●Vehicles with curtain shield airbags: Do
not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and
seriously injure or kill you, should the
SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
108
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●Vehicles without side and curtain shield airbags: If the areas where the
SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad are damaged or
cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
●Vehicles with side and curtain shield airbags: If the areas where the SRS
airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar
garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota
dealer.
109
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
●Vehicles without side airbags and curtain shield airbags: Repairs, modifi-
cations, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel,
dashboard, seats or seat upholstery.
●Vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags: Repairs, modifica-
tions, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel,
dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rail.
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment.
●Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kan-
garoo bar etc.).
●Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD
players.
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
110
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system. This system detects the conditions of the front passen-
ger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
SRS warning light
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
111
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant
classification system
■Adult*1
■Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator lights
“AIR BAG
ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger's seat belt reminder
light
Flashing*
2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passen-
ger side
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger's seat belt reminder
light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passen-
ger side Activated
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner
112
1-7. Safety information
■Unoccupied
■There is a malfunction in the system
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec-
ognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and pos-
ture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system
sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator lights
Not illumi-
nated
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger's seat belt reminder
light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passen-
ger side Activated
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner Deactivated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS warning light On
Front passenger's seat belt reminder
light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passen-
ger side Activated
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner
113
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 117)
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 120)
114
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant clas-
sification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger's seat belt tab has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side
may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the
event of collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket).
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the second seat.
●Do not let a passenger in the second seat lift the front passenger seat with
their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a second
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger's airbags will not deploy in the event of
a severe accident. If the seatback touches the second seat, return the
seatback to a position where it does not touch the second seat. Keep the
front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is mov-
ing. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of
the seat belt system.
115
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the second seat,
or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front
passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 120)
●Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
●Child restraint systems installed on the second seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers
the seat cushion surface.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
116
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 120)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be prop-
erly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder
belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the
use of child restraint systems.
117
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Types of child restraint
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing Convertible seat
Booster seat
118
1-7. Safety information
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
●If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 68)
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
●Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-fac-
ing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-
senger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
119
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or an accident.
●Vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags: Do not allow the
child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or
the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rail from which the
side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain
shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to
the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
■Child restraint lock function belt precaution
Do not allow children to play with the child restraint lock function belt. If the
belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it will not be possible to pull the
belt out leading to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.
120
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the outside rear seats using the LATCH
anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a
child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren) system.
Second outside seats: Child
restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the rear outside seats. (But-
tons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt)
121
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Second outside seats: Anchor
brackets (for top tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for the second outside seats.
Second center seat: Anchor
brackets (for top tether strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for the second center seat.
122
1-7. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system (second outside seats only)
Fold the seatback while pulling
the lever. Return the seatback
and secure it at the 1st lock posi-
tion (most upright position).
Adjust the seatback to the 3rd
lock position. (P. 54)
1st lock position
7th lock position
Type A
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
The bars are installed in the
clearance between the seat cush-
ion and seatback.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Canada only
123
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors.
The bars are installed in the
clearance between the seat cush-
ion and seatback.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP
2
124
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
seat facing the rear of the vehi-
cle.
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and then allow it to retract
slightly in order to activate the
ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
125
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
While pushing the child seat
down into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■Forward facing Convertible seat
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder strap
and then allow it to retract
slightly into the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
126
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat
is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 127)
■Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the
seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Sit the child in the booster seat.
Fit the seat belt to the booster
seat according to the manufac-
turer's instructions and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder, and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(P. 68)
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
127
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Second center seat: Release the
center seat belt as shown in the
illustration after removing the
child restraint.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap (second seats
only)
■Outside seats
Remove the head restraint.
STEP
1
128
1-7. Safety information
Slide the seats forward slightly if
it is in the rear-most position.
Secure the child restraint using
the seat belt. Latch the hook
onto the anchor bracket and
tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Replace the head restraint.
Move the seats to the rear-most
lock position.
STEP
2
STEP
3
Front of vehicle
STEP
4
STEP
5
129
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Center seat
Open the anchor bracket cover.
Secure the child restraint using
the seat belt. Latch the hook
onto the anchor bracket and
tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
130
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR
lock mode. (P. 71)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or dis-
comfort to the child.
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●If the driver's seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
●Adjust the front passenger seat or sec-
ond seats so that it does not interfere
with the child restraint system.
●Only put a forward-facing or booster
child seat on the front seat when
unavoidable. When installing a forward-
facing or booster child seat on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible even if “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated. Fail-
ing to do so may result in death or seri-
ous injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
131
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
●When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both
seat cushions to the same position and align seatbacks at the same angle.
Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and
this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or an accident.
●When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, move the seat
as far back as possible (second seat only), with the seatback close to the
child restraint system.
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
●Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is
secure.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may
cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of
a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
132
1-7. Safety information
When driving 2
133
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle............ 134
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles with smart
key system).................... 143
Engine (ignition) switch
(vehicles without smart
key system).................... 147
Automatic transmission.... 150
Turn signal lever .............. 153
Parking brake................... 154
Horn ................................. 155
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ......... 156
Indicators and warning
lights .............................. 159
Trip information display.... 162
2-3. Operating the lights and
wipers
Headlight switch............... 165
Fog light switch ................ 168
Windshield wipers and
washer ........................... 169
Rear window wiper and
washer ........................... 171
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control................... 172
Rear view monitor
system ........................... 175
Driving assist systems ..... 180
Hill-start assist control...... 187
Downhill assist control
system ........................... 189
Four-wheel drive lock
switch............................. 192
2-5. Driving information
Utility vehicle
precautions .................... 193
Cargo and luggage .......... 198
Vehicle load limits ............ 204
Winter driving tips ............ 206
Trailer towing ................... 210
Dinghy towing .................. 218
134
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing.
■Starting the engine
P. 143, 147
■Driving
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 150)
Release the parking brake. (P. 154)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■Stopping
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N. (P. 150)
■Parking the vehicle
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 154)
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 150)
When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.
Vehicles without smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the
engine.
Vehicles with smart key system:
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
135
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Starting on a steep uphill
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended
to observe:
●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
●For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodi-
cally or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding-down.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
136
2-1. Driving procedures
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 470)
CAUTION
■When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine run-
ning. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator
pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving
position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
137
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehi-
cle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a
serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
●Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the
vehicle is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and
may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to
an accident.
●Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if
the engine is not running.
●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 151)
●When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking
brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing
an accident.
●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents
that may result in death or serious injury.
●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bod-
ies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not drive the vehicle off-road.
This is not a 4WD vehicle designed for real off-road driving. Proceed with
all due caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road.
●Do not drive across river crossings or through other bodies of water.
This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage
the engine or cause other serious damage to the vehicle.
138
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-
shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an
accident.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate
suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to pre-
vent an accident caused by the vehicle moving.
139
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle's electrical components.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
■Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and
odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health haz-
ard.
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
140
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking the vehicle
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one
side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking
brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the
pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.
●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance
becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
■If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged (4WD models)
Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or
stuck in sand or mud etc. This may damage the drive system components or
propel the vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident.
141
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake ped-
als together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed.
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a
long time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
●The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace the flat tire with a new one. (P. 439)
142
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, tran-
saxle, transfer (4WD models), rear differential (4WD models), etc.
●Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft (4WD models), bearings and
suspension joints (where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings,
etc.
143
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START
STOP” switch modes.
■Starting the engine
The engine can be started in any mode by operating the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch at the same time as depressing the brake
pedal.
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green. If the
indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 30 seconds,
whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started
from any mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
144
2-1. Driving procedures
■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each
time the switch is pressed.)
OFF*
The emergency flashers can
be used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a posi-
tion other than P when turn-
ing off the engine, the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch will be turned to
ACCESSORY mode, not to
OFF.
145
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Steering lock release
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 92)
■When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn
OFF.
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 32
■When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 385
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 30
■Note for the entry function
P. 32
Make sure that the steering wheel lock is
released.
To release the steering wheel lock, gently
turn the wheel left or right while pressing
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
When the steering wheel lock does not
release, the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator will flash green.
146
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving
except in an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven,
this could lead to an unexpected accident.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■When starting the engine
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
147
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without smart key system)
■Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the
engine.
■Engine (ignition) switch
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(The key can be removed only
when the shift lever is in “P”.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
148
2-1. Driving procedures
■Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
■Steering lock release
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 92)
■Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened, while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not press the
accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
key only to the “ACC” position.
Shift the shift lever to P.
(P. 150)
Push in the key and turn to the
“LOCK” position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly in either
direction.
149
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the key in the “ACC” or “ON” position for a long period if the
engine is not running.
■When starting the engine
●Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the
starter and wiring systems.
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
150
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
4-speed models
5-speed models
151
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Vehicles without smart key system:
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
Vehicles with smart key system:
While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift
lever.
■Shift position uses
*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the
“D” position for normal driving.
Shift position Function
4-speed models 5-speed models
PParking the vehicle/starting the engine
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*
4Position for engine
braking
3,2 Position for more powerful engine braking
LPosition for maximum engine braking
152
2-1. Driving procedures
■Downshifting restrictions
The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded.
4-speed models (2WD)
mph (km/h)
4-speed models (4WD)
mph (km/h)
5-speed models
mph (km/h)
■When driving with the cruise control system
4-speed models
Engine braking will not occur when downshifting from D to 3. (P. 172)
5-speed models
Engine braking will not occur when downshifting from D to 4. (P. 172)
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 453
Downshifting Maximum speed
3 2 75 (121)
2 L 37 (60)
Downshifting Maximum speed
3 2 72 (117)
2 L 36 (58)
Downshifting Maximum speed
4 3 100 (161)
3 2 62 (99)
2 L 26 (42)
153
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Turn signal lever
■Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
154
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
Sets the parking brake
Fully apply the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the but-
ton.
U.S.A.Canada
156
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Vehicles without smart key system
The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the
engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The following gauges, meters and displays illuminate when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
157
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Brighter
Darker
When the headlight switch is
turned on, the brightness will
be reduced slightly unless the
control dial is turned fully up.
Trip information display
P. 162
Automatic transmission shift position indicator lights
P. 150
Odometer/trip meter
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to
record and display different distances independently.
Odometer/trip meter switching and trip meter resetting button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and hold-
ing the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being dis-
played.
158
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
●The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red
zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 460)
159
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-
ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-
tems.
■Instrument cluster
■Center panel
160
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system) or
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without
smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer for details.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 153)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 165)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 165)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 165)
(if equipped)
Downhill assist control
system indicator
(P. 189) (if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 168)
Slip indicator
(P. 181)
(2WD models)
“AUTO LSD” indicator
(P. 182)
(4WD models)
Four-wheel drive lock
indicator (P. 192)
VSC OFF indicator
(P. 182)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 172)
Engine immobilizer sys-
tem indicator (P. 92)
(4WD models)
“TRAC OFF” indicator
(P. 183)
*
*
*
*
“AIR BAG ON”
and “AIR BAG
OFF” indica-
tor (P. 110)
*
*
*
161
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag warning light
not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems
are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in
death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.
■Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (P. 422)
*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system) or
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position (vehicles without
smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer for details.
(Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada)
(U.S.A.) (U.S.A.)
(if equipped) (if equipped)
(if equipped)
(4WD models)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
163
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Trip information
Type A
Push the “DISP” button to dis-
play trip information.
Display items can be switched
by pressing the “DISP” button.
Type B
Push the “DISP” button to dis-
play trip information.
Display items can be switched
by pressing the “DISP” button.
■Outside temperature
■Instantaneous fuel consumption
Indicates the outside temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).
When the outside air temperature falls below 37°F
(3°C) while driving, the temperature display flashes
to indicate that the outside air temperature is becom-
ing low.
Displays the instantaneous fuel consumption.
164
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Average fuel consumption
■Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not
be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to
change.
●When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20
km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the
entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset.
To reset the calculations, return the mode to
“AVG” and push and hold the “DISP” button until
the display shows “0”.
165
2
When driving
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever forward to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams
off.
Pull the lever toward you to
turn on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
The side marker, park-
ing, tail, license plate
and instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
The headlights and
parking lights turn on
and off automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
or the engine switch is
in ON)
U.S.A.Canada
(if equipped)
166
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■Daytime running light system (if equipped)
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on
automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the
parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at
night.
■Headlight control sensor (with automatic light control system)
■Automatic light off system
Vehicles without smart key system:
The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after driver’s door is
opened and closed if the engine switch has been turned to “ACC” or “LOCK”
position.
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or
turn the headlight switch off and then back to or .
Vehicles with smart key system:
The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after driver’s door is
opened and closed if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch has been turned to
ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF.
To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode, or turn the headlight switch off and then back to or
.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be deactivated.
(Customizable features P. 491)
The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or any-
thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
167
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
168
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such
as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are
on low beam.
Off
Front fog lights on
: If equipped
169
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Windshield wipers and washer
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation.
Intermittent windshield
wiper operation
Low speed windshield wiper
operation
High speed windshield
wiper operation
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
170
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled
toward you and held continually.
■When a nozzle is blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
171
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Rear window wiper and washer
■The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the rear window.
■When a nozzle is blocked
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
Intermittent window wiper
operation
Normal window wiper oper-
ation
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
172
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the acceler-
ator.
Indicator
Cruise control switch
■Setting the vehicle speed
Turn the “ON-OFF” button on.
Press the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate to
the desired speed and push
the lever down to set the
cruise control speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
173
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in D or 3 (4-speed models), or D or 4 (5-speed models).
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Within the limits
of the engine’s capabilities, cruising speed can be maintained up or down
grades.
■Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
■Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
Fine adjustment of the set
speed can be made by lightly
pushing the lever up or down
and releasing it.
■Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push
the lever up.
174
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Coast braking function
●Holding the lever down to decrease the set speed activates the brake
system automatically, decelerating the vehicle quickly.
While the brake system is operating, the stop lights and high mounted
stoplight will turn on.
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment during the opera-
tion of the brake system. The sound means the brake system is operat-
ing and it does not indicate a malfunction.
■Automatic cruise control cancellation
The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset
vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
●Enhanced VSC is activated.
■If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Turn the “ON-OFF” button off once, and then reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Contact your Toyota dealer and have your Toyota inspected.
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
175
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Rear view monitor system (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an
image of the area behind the vehicle. The image is displayed in
reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to the
one on the inside rear view mirror.
The rear view image is dis-
played when the shift lever is
in the R position.
If the shift lever is shifted out of
R, the screen is turned off.
176
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Displayed area
Vehicles without spare tire
Vehicles with spare tire
The area covered by the camera is lim-
ited. Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
Corners of bumper
The area covered by the camera is lim-
ited. Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation or
road conditions.
The area displayed on the screen is
reduced because the spare tire partially
blocks the field of view of the camera.
Also, the rear mounted spare tire
extends past the rear bumper.
Spare tire
Corners of bumper
177
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Rear view monitor system camera
Vehicles without spare tire
Vehicles with spare tire
In the following cases, it may become
difficult to see the images on the
screen, even when the system is func-
tioning correctly.
●The vehicle is in a dark area, such
as at night.
●The temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
●Water droplets are on the camera
lens or humidity is high, such as
when it rains.
●Foreign matter, such as snow or
mud, adheres to the camera lens.
●The sun or headlights are shining
directly into the camera lens.
In the following cases, it may become
difficult to see the images on the
screen, even when the system is func-
tioning correctly.
●The vehicle is in a dark area, such
as at night.
●The temperature near the lens is
extremely high or low.
●Water droplets are on the camera
lens or humidity is high, such as
when it rains.
●Foreign matter, such as snow or
mud, adheres to the camera lens.
●The sun or headlights are shining
directly into the camera lens.
178
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Smear effect
■The rear view monitor system can be used when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position, the back door is closed and the
shift lever is in R.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the back door
is closed and the shift lever is in R.
■To turn off the rear view monitor display
Press the “AUTO” switch. The indicator turns amber. Pressing the “AUTO”
switch again turns the display back on.
In the following situations, the display will be re-enabled if it has been turned
off.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
If a bright light, such as sunlight
reflected off the vehicle body, is picked
up by the camera, a smear effect* char-
acteristic to the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect A phenomenon that
occurs when a bright light is picked
up by the camera; when transmitted
by the camera, the light source
appears to have a vertical streak
above and below it.
179
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When using the rear view monitor system
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries.
●Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.
●Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is
clear.
●Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual
distances.
●Vehicles with spare tire: The spare tire is the rear-most edge of the vehicle
extending past the rear bumper. Take care not to hit any obstacles with the
spare tire while reversing.
■Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system
●If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the camera’s position and mounting
angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
●Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the
vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.
●If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with
water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the camera lens is extremely dirty, wash
with a mild cleanser and rinse.
●The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly
distorted when the system is cold.
180
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces.
■TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■AUTO LSD function (2WD models)
The AUTO LSD function is activated when the system is in TRAC off
mode. It operates when one of the drive wheels is spinning, such as
when the wheel is spinning freely on ice or mud. The system applies
the brakes to the spinning wheel and transfers some of the torque to
the other wheel to secure drive power.
■Active torque control 4WD system (4WD models)
Automatically switches from front-wheel drive to four-wheel drive
(4WD) according to the driving conditions, helping to ensure reliable
handling and stability. Examples of conditions where the system will
switch to 4WD are when cornering, going uphill, starting off or acceler-
ating, and when the road surface is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.
■EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.
181
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
When the Enhanced VSC/TRAC are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping or if spins, the slip indicator
light flashes to indicate that the
Enhanced VSC/TRAC systems
are operating.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that Enhanced VSC is
operating.
■Hill-start assist control (if equipped)
(P. 187)
■Downhill assist control system (if equipped)
(P. 189)
182
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable TRAC and/or Enhanced VSC (2WD models)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and Enhanced
VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may
need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order
to free it. The AUTO LSD function is activated when the system is in
TRAC off mode.
■Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the
button to turn off TRAC.
The “AUTO LSD” and VSC OFF
indicator lights should come on.
While the AUTO LSD function is
operating the slip indicator light
flashes.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
■Turning off TRAC and Enhanced VSC
Push and hold the button while
the vehicle is stopped to turn off
TRAC and Enhanced VSC.
The VSC OFF indicator light
should come on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
183
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
To disable TRAC and/or Enhanced VSC (4WD models)
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and Enhanced
VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may
need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order
to free it.
■Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the
button to turn off TRAC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
should come on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
■Turning off TRAC and Enhanced VSC
Push and hold the button while
the vehicle is stopped to turn off
TRAC and Enhanced VSC.
The “TRAC OFF” and VSC OFF
indicator lights should come on.
Push the button again to turn the
system back on.
184
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and Enhanced VSC
Vehicles without smart key system
Turning the engine switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and Enhanced
VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
Vehicles with smart key system
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF after turning off the TRAC
and Enhanced VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
■Automatic TRAC reactivation
2WD models
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will be reactivated
while vehicle speed is increased.
4WD models
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when
vehicle speed increases.
■Automatic TRAC and Enhanced VSC reactivation
If the TRAC and Enhanced VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not
turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, TRAC and Enhanced VSC
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi-
cate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■When the AUTO LSD function operates continuously
The brake actuator may overheat. In that case, the system will stop the
AUTO LSD function, a buzzer will sound and the slip indicator will stay on
steady. Refrain from using the AUTO LSD function until the slip indicator
goes off. (There is no problem with continuing driving normally.)
185
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be
heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Reduced effectiveness of EPS
The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating
when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The
steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from
excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The sys-
tem should return to normal within 10 minutes.
■If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the Enhanced VSC, TRAC and AUTO LSD
function. Contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick road.
■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating on the wet or slick roads
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-
ations.
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
186
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■When the Enhanced VSC is activated
The slip indicator flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive care-
fully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when
the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■When TRAC and Enhanced VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do
not turn off TRAC and Enhanced VSC unless necessary.
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total
load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the appro-
priate tire pressure level.
The ABS and Enhanced VSC systems will not function correctly if different
tires are fitted on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
187
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Hill-start assist control
■Hill-start assist control operating conditions
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The parking brake is not applied.
• The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
■Hill-start assist control
●While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automati-
cally applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and
the high mounted stoplight turn on.
●Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal
is released.
●If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when
the brake pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the
brake pedal (do not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly
depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check if the operat-
ing conditions explained above have been met.
Hill-start assist control helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope.
To engage hill-start assist con-
trol, further depress the brake
pedal when the vehicle is
stopped completely.
A buzzer will sound once to
indicate the system is acti-
vated. The slip indicator will
also start flashing.
: If equipped
188
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Hill-start assist control buzzer
●When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once
when the shift lever is in a position other than R.
●In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the
buzzer will sound twice when the shift lever is in a position other than R.
• No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds
of releasing the brake pedal.
• The shift lever is moved to P.
• The parking brake is applied.
• The brake pedal is depressed again.
●When the shift lever is in R, the buzzer indicating the start and end of the
operation does not sound. Use the slip indicator status (flashing or off) to
confirm if hill-start assist control is operating.
■If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■Hill-start assist control
●Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on extremely steep
inclines or roads covered in ice.
●Do not use hill-start assist control to stop or park the vehicle on an incline.
189
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Downhill assist control system
While the downhill assist control system is operating
The slip indicator will flash to
indicate that the downhill assist
control system is operating, and
the stop lights and high mounted
stoplight will turn on.
With the downhill assist control system, the vehicle is able to
descend a steep hill while maintaining a constant low speed of about
3 mph (5 km/h) without brake pedal operation.
■Activating the downhill assist control system
Press the “DAC” switch.
The downhill assist control sys-
tem indicator will come on to
indicate that the downhill assist
control system is activated.
Pressing the switch again turns
the system off.
: If equipped
190
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Conditions in which the downhill assist control system does not oper-
ate or will stop operating
●In the following situations, the downhill assist control system indicator
flashes and the downhill assist control system does not operate or will
stop operating:
• The shift lever is not in L or R.
• The vehicle speed is higher than 15 mph (25 km/h).
●If the accelerate or brake pedal is depressed, the downhill assist control
system will stop operating with the downhill assist control system indica-
tor stayed on.
■If the “DAC” switch is turned off while the downhill assist control sys-
tem is operating
The downhill assist control system gradually ceases operation. The downhill
assist control system indicator will flash during the canceling operation, and
then go off when the system is fully off.
■Downhill assist control system operation sound
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment while the downhill
assist control system is operating. This sound does not indicate a mal-
function.
●If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the downhill assist
control system is operating, a sound caused by the release of system
operation may be heard, or you may feel the brake pedal push-back. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
■When the downhill assist control system operates continuously
The brake actuator may overheat. In that case, the downhill assist control
system will stop operating, a buzzer will sound and the downhill assist con-
trol system indicator will start flashing. Refrain from using the system until
the downhill assist control system indicator stays on. (There is no problem
with continuing driving normally.)
■If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
191
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Conditions which may affect the downhill assist control system opera-
tion
●Do not rely too heavily on the downhill assist control system. On extremely
steep inclines, icy surfaces or muddy roads, the vehicle may slip and the
system may not be able to maintain the constant low vehicle speed of
about 3 mph (5 km/h), leading to an accident causing death or serious
injury.
●Do not shift the shift lever to R while driving forward, or to D while driving
backward. Doing so may cause the wheels to lock up, leading to an acci-
dent causing death or serious injury. In addition, excessive stress will be
applied to the automatic transmission, possibly resulting in damage.
192
2-4. Using other driving systems
Four-wheel drive lock switch (4WD models)
■Four-wheel drive lock mode can be operated when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Four-wheel drive lock mode
●Four-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the brakes are applied to
ensure the ABS and Enhanced VSC systems operate effectively.
●Four-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the vehicle speed exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h).
Four-wheel drive lock mode can be used when a large amount of
drive power needs to be applied to all the wheels, such as when the
vehicle gets stuck in mud and you need to free it.
Press the switch.
The torque of the engine is dis-
tributed to the rear wheels to
the maximum extent possible
in accordance with driving con-
ditions.
Pressing the switch again can-
cels four-wheel drive lock
mode and returns the active
torque control 4WD system to
normal mode. (P. 180)
193
2
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Utility vehicle precautions
Off-road vehicle feature
●Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity
than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes
this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehi-
cles.
●An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road allowing you to anticipate problems.
●It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher
ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its
center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety
of off-road applications.
194
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■Off-road vehicle precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious per-
sonal injury or damage to your vehicle:
●In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
●Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
●Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehi-
cle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
●Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher
center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordi-
nary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
●Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle)
can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.
195
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Off-road driving
When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following pre-
cautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the
closure of areas to off-road vehicles.
●Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permit-
ted to travel.
●Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering
private property.
●Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs
that restrict travel.
●Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving tech-
niques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to
roads.
■Additional information for off-road driving
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road,
consult the following organizations.
●State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
●State Motor Vehicle Bureau
●Recreational Vehicle Clubs
●U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
196
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■Off-road driving precautions
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or
serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
●Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving
in dangerous places.
●Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump
could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and espe-
cially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
●Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.
●After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, water, etc., check that
there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped
on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the
vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody,
a breakdown or fire could occur.
●When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss
of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also
risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.
NOTICE
■To prevent the water damage
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does not occur.
●Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
●Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ulti-
mately damage.
●Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and pre-
mature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and
transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
197
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
NOTICE
■When you drive through water
If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check
the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream for firmness. Drive
slowly and avoid deep water.
■Inspection after off-road driving
●Sand and mud that has accumulated around brake discs may affect brak-
ing efficiency and may damage brake system components.
●Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driv-
ing that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
198
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Adjusting the cross rail positions
Turn the knobs counterclockwise
to release the cross rails.
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
●Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
■Roof luggage carrier (if equipped)
Roof rails
Cross rails
STEP
1
199
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Slide the cross rails to the appro-
priate position for loading lug-
gage and turn the knobs
clockwise to tighten the cross
rails securely.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 150)
= 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
STEP
2
200
2-5. Driving information
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are
riding in your vehicle, the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity will be as follows:
Without third seat
Total load capacity: 825 lb. (375 kg)
825 lb. - 366 lb. = 459 lb. (375 kg - 166 kg = 209 kg)
With third seat
Total load capacity: 1155 lb. (525 kg)
1155 lb. - 366 lb. = 789 lb. (525 kg - 166 kg = 359 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be
reduced as follows:
Without third seat
459 lb. - 388 lb. = 71 lb. (209 kg - 176 kg = 33 kg)
With third seat
789 lb. - 388 lb. = 401 lb. (359 kg - 176 kg = 183 kg)
201
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
CAUTION
■Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compart-
ment.
●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the
item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the
pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit
the driver or passengers, causing an accident.
• Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Luggage cover
• Instrument panel
• Dashboard
• Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
●Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not
designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer
serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
202
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■Capacity and distribution
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking con-
trol which may cause death or serious injury.
■Roof luggage carrier precautions
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:
●Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the
front and rear axles.
●If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length
or width. (P. 466)
●Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof
luggage carrier.
●Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of
control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly
and result in death or serious injury.
●If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop
the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo
remains in its place.
●Do not exceed 102.6 lb. (46.2 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage
carrier.
■Cross rail adjustment
Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and
rearward them.
Failure to do so may cause an unexpected accident or severe injury in
the event of emergency braking or a collision.
203
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
NOTICE
■When loading luggage (vehicles with moon roof)
Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.
204
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information
label. (P. 375)
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.
■Total load capacity: Without third seat
825 lb. (375 kg)
With third seat
1155 lb. (525 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
■Seating capacity: Without third seat
5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
With third seat
7 occupants (Front 2, Rear 5)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■Towing capacity
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine: 1500 lb. (680 kg)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine: Without towing package
2000 lb. (907 kg)
With towing package
3500 lb. (1588 kg)
Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.
■Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
205
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.
206
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-
ate to the prevailing weather conditions.
■Pre-winter preparations
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the level and specific grav-
ity of battery electrolyte.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
■Before driving the vehicle
Observe the following according to the driving conditions.
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
●Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
●Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow
that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the
brakes.
207
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
Cross chain
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
Regulations on the use of snow chains
●Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before install-
ing chains.
●Install the chains on the front tires.
●Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
■When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suit-
able to road conditions.
■When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it
from being released.
208
2-5. Driving information
■Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the front tires.
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
manual.
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
●Use tires of the specified size.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
●Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.
■Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
209
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
NOTICE
Vehicles with a tire pressure warning system:
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or
legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
210
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle.
Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, perfor-
mance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety
and the safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by
towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
■Weight limits
Confirm that the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
■Gross vehicle weight
The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The
gross vehicle weight is the sum weight of the unloaded vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. Also
included is the weight of any special equipment installed on your
vehicle.
■Gross axle weight
The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribu-
tion of the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the Certification
Label.
Certification label
211
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Towing a trailer
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
■Trailer tongue load
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue
load is 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the
maximum load of the following. (Tongue load / Total trailer
weight x 100 = 9 to 11%)
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine: 150 lb. (68 kg)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Without towing package: 200 lb. (90 kg)
With towing package: 350 lb. (158 kg)
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with
platform scales found at highway weighing stations, building
supply companies, trucking companies, junk yards, etc.
Total trailer weight
Tongue load
212
2-5. Driving information
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established
by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be rated for
towing a higher weight, the operator must never exceed the maxi-
mum weight rating specified for the trailer hitch.
■Before towing
●Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 475)
●Trailer tires should be inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's rec-
ommendation.
●All trailer lights must work in order to be legal.
●Confirm all lights work each time you connect them.
●Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer
is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper
tongue load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
●Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded.
●Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal, state/provincial
or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for
towing purposes.
■Break-in schedule
Toyota recommends that you do not use a new vehicle or a vehicle with any
new power train components (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bear-
ings, etc.) to tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of driving.
■Maintenance
●If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance
due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner's Manual Supplement”.)
●Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approxi-
mately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
213
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
■To avoid accident or injury
●Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and trailer tongue load capacities.
●Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About
60% of the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining
40% in the rear.
●Do not use cruise control when you are towing.
■Hitches
●Use only a hitch that conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
●Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
●Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.
●Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After
removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent
entry of any substances into the vehicle.
■When towing a trailer
●If the gross trailer weight exceeds 600 lb. (272 kg), trailer brakes are
required.
●Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehi-
cle's braking effectiveness.
●Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both
the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch
ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
214
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The 3 main
causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed
and improper trailer loading. Keep the following in mind when towing.
●Before starting out, check the trailer lights and the vehicle-trailer
connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
●Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in
an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel
of the vehicle.
NOTICE
■When installing a trailer hitch
●Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
●Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or tires.
■Brakes
Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable fed-
eral and state/provincial regulations.
■Safety chain
A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross
under the trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in
the case that it becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain
installation procedure, ask your Toyota dealer.
■Do not directly splice trailer lights
Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system
and cause a malfunction.
215
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
●Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing
without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an acci-
dent.
●As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-
vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h)
of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
●Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and
loss of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
●Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
●Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before mak-
ing turns.
●Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making
a larger than normal turning radius.
●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your
vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to
prepare for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may
cause your vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip
the steering wheel, reduce speed immediately but gradually, and
steer straight ahead. Never increase speed. If you make no
extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and
trailer will stabilize.
●Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires consider-
able distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of
your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing
lanes.
●In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical charging
performance, do not use overdrive.
216
2-5. Driving information
●Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may
overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when
driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air condition-
ing (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
(P. 460)
●Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do
so only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and
trailer wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into P and turn off the engine.
●When restarting after parking on a slope:
With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep
the brake pedal pressed.
Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.
Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or
back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
217
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
■To avoid an accident
●Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or posted towing speed limit, whichever
is lower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination
increases as speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may cause
loss of control.
●Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.
●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too
frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced
braking efficiency.
218
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on
the ground) behind a motor home.
Interior features 3
219
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Manual air conditioning
system ........................... 220
Automatic air conditioning
system ........................... 225
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers....................... 233
Windshield wiper
de-icer............................ 235
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types.......... 236
Using the radio................. 239
Using the CD player......... 245
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs..................... 252
Optimal use of the audio
system ........................... 259
Using the AUX adapter .... 262
Using the steering wheel
audio switches ............... 263
3-3. Using the hands-free phone
system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone)
features.......................... 266
Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone)......... 270
Making a phone call......... 278
Setting a cellular phone ... 284
Security and system
setup .............................. 289
Using the phone book ...... 292
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ............... 300
• Personal/interior light
main switch .................... 301
• Personal/interior lights ... 301
• Interior light .................... 302
• Luggage compartment
light ................................ 302
3-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features .... 304
• Glove box....................... 305
• Console box................... 306
• Overhead console.......... 307
• Cup holders ................... 308
• Bottle holders................. 309
• Auxiliary box .................. 311
3-6. Other interior features
Sun visors ........................ 312
Vanity mirrors................... 313
Clock ................................ 314
Power outlets ................... 315
Seat heaters..................... 318
Armrest ............................ 320
Coat hooks....................... 321
Floor mat.......................... 322
Luggage compartment
features.......................... 323
220
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Manual air conditioning system
Adjusting the settings
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-
clockwise (cool).
If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
■Adjusting the fan speed
Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counter-
clockwise (decrease).
Set the dial to “0” to turn the fan off.
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selection dial
Air conditioning on/off switch
Temperature control dial
Outside air or recirculated air mode
: If equipped
221
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Changing the air outlets
Set the air outlet selection dial to an appropriate position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can be also
selected for more detailed adjustment.
Upper body
Upper body and feet
: Vehicles with third seats
Feet
: Vehicles with third seats
222
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Feet and windshield
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recircu-
lated air mode when the dial is set
at this position.
Pressing to turn the air
conditioning on clears the wind-
shield and side windows faster.
: Vehicles with third seats
Windshield and side windows
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recircu-
lated air mode when the dial is set
at this position.
Pressing to turn the air
conditioning on clears the wind-
shield and side windows faster.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.
223
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the position of the air outlets
Front outlets (center)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Front outlets (right and left sides)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Opening and closing the side outlets
Open the vent.
Close the vent.
224
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for
an extended period.
■Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically be switched to outside air mode in
situations where the windows need to be defogged.
■When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.
■When the indicator light on flashes
Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator
light keeps flashing. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it
inspected by your Toyota dealer.
■When is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flow-
ing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature setting.
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
225
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Automatic air conditioning system
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-
ting.
Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to
decrease the temperature.
Air outlets and fan speed for the driver and passenger seats may be
set separately depending on the temperature setting.
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tem-
perature setting.
Fan speed
Air conditioning
on/off switch
Changes the air outlets used
Off
Driver's side
temperature control
Automatic mode
Windshield defogger
Outside air or
recirculated air mode
Air flow display
Micro dust and pollen filter
Passenger’s side
temperature control
STEP
1
STEP
2
: If equipped
226
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the settings
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to
decrease the temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simulta-
neous modes each time is pressed.
Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is off): Only (driver’s
side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.
Individual mode (the indicator on is on): The temperature for the
driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately. Operating the
passenger's side temperature control starts individual mode.
■Adjusting the fan speed
Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on .
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press to turn the fan off.
227
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Changing the air outlets
Press the desired button, , , or .
The air flow shown on the display indicates the following.
Upper body
Upper body and feet
: Vehicles with third seats
Feet
: Vehicles with third seats
228
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Feet and windshield
: Vehicles with third seats
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.
Defogging the windshield
Press .
The air conditioning system oper-
ates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switched to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return
to recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.
229
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press .
Outside air mode will be switched
to recirculated air mode. Pollen is
removed from the air and the air
flows to the upper part of the
body.
Usually the system will turn off
automatically after approximately
3 minutes.
To stop the operation, press
again.
Adjusting the position of the air outlets
Front outlets (center)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
230
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front outlets (right and left sides)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Opening and closing the side outlets
Open the vent.
Close the vent.
■Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature set-
ting and ambient conditions. In addition, the following may occur.
●The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the
coolest temperature setting is selected in summer.
●Immediately after is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow.
●Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is
on.
■Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for
an extended period.
231
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situa-
tions where the windows need to be defogged.
■When outside temperature approaches 32F (0C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.
■When is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flow-
ing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature setting.
■Micro dust and pollen filter
●In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is
cold, the following may occur.
• Outside air mode is not switched to recirculated air mode.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation is canceled after 1 minute.
●In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .
■When the indicator light on flashes
Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator
light keep flashing. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected
by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind-
shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your
vision.
232
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
233
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
The rear window defogger is used to defog the rear window. The out-
side rear view mirror defoggers* are used to remove frost, dew or
raindrops from the outside rear view mirrors.
Vehicles with manual air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
*: Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers
234
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■The defogger can be operated when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view
mirror defoggers)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
CAUTION
■Outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view
mirror defoggers)
The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch
them to prevent from burning yourself.
235
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Windshield wiper de-icer
■The de-icer can be operated when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the
front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the wind-
shield and wiper blades.
On/off
The de-icer will automatically
turn off after approximately 15
minutes.
: If equipped
236
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer
to the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system (type A)
CD player with changer controller and AM/FM radio
Without navigation system (type B)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
237
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is
operating.
Without navigation system (type C)
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
Title Page
Using the radio P. 239
Using the CD player P. 245
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 252
Optimal use of the audio system P. 259
Using the AUX adapter P. 262
Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 263
238
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada (for U.S.A. and Canada)
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the
user’s authority to operate this device.
●Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disas-
semble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo-
sure.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is
off.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
239
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the radio
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Search for desired stations by turning or pressing “”
or “” on .
Press and hold the button (from to ) the station is
to be set to until you hear a beep.
Seeking the
frequency
Station selector
AM·SAT/FM mode buttons
Scanning for receivable stations
Changing the
channel
Power Volume
Adjusting the frequency
(AM, FM mode) or
channel (SAT mode)
Displaying
radio text
messages
STEP
1
STEP
2
240
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■Scanning the preset radio stations
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press once
again.
■Scanning all radio stations within range
Press .
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press once
again.
XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press .
The display changes as follows each time is
pressed.
AM SAT1 SAT2 SAT3
Turn to select the desired channel in the all categories,
or press “” or “” on to select the desired channel in
the current category.
■Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press and hold the button (from
to ) the channel is to be set to until you hear a beep.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
241
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Changing the channel category
Press “” or “” on .
■Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
●Scanning channels in the current category
Press .
When the desired channel is reached, press
again.
●Scanning preset channels
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the desired channel is reached, press
again.
■Displaying text information
Press .
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time is pressed.
●Channel name
●Title (song/program title)
●Name (artist name/feature)
●Channel number
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
242
3-2. Using the audio system
■When the battery is disconnected
Station presets are erased.
■Reception sensitivity
●Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may
adversely affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.
●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con-
tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength
and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●The radio antenna is mounted on the roof. The antenna can be removed
from the base by turning it.
■XM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts
provided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 con-
tiguous states and 10 Canadian provinces.
●XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A.
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-967-2346.
Canada
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a
problem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID
number will appear.
●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accom-
panying Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
243
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■If the satellite radio does not operate normally (if equipped)
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the dis-
play. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested
corrective action.
“ANTENNA”
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check
whether the XM® antenna cable is attached
securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the sur-
rounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified
dealer.
“UPDATING”
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite
Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest
encryption code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio
for subscription information. When a contract is
canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all
free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not autho-
rized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio
returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it
does not change automatically, select another
channel. If you want to listen to the premium chan-
nel, contact the XM® Satellite Radio.
“NO SIGNAL”
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.
“LOADING” The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
“OFF AIR” The channel you selected is not broadcasting any
programming. Select another channel.
“-----”
There is no song/program title or artist name/fea-
ture associated with the channel at that time. No
action is needed.
244
3-2. Using the audio system
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-
438-9677 (Canada).
■Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. How-
ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of
the following:
●Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
●Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
●Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases.
●The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.
●A cover will be put on the vehicle.
“---”
The channel you selected is no longer available.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to
the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not
change automatically, select another channel.
245
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the CD player
Loading CDs
■Loading a CD
Type A
Insert a CD.
Type B and C
Press .
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
Random playback
Track
selection
Repeat play
Playback
CD eject
Displaying
text
messages
CD selection (with a CD changer)
CD insert
(type B and C)
Search
playback
CD slot
Reverse
Fast-forward
Power Volume
STEP
1
STEP
2
246
3-2. Using the audio system
■Loading multiple CDs (type B and C)
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
“WAIT” is shown on the display.
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from
amber to green again.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To stop the operation, press .
Ejecting CDs
■Ejecting a CD
Type A
Press and remove the CD.
Type B and C
To select the CD to be ejected, press () or ().
The number of the CD selected is shown on the display.
Press and remove the CD.
■Ejecting all the CDs (type B and C)
Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove
the CDs.
Selecting a track
Press “” to move up or “” to move down using until the
desired track number is displayed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
247
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press (reverse) or (fast-for-
ward).
Scanning tracks
Press .
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
Press again when the desired track is reached.
Selecting a CD (with a CD changer)
■To select a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press () or ().
■To scan loaded CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
Press again when the desired CD is reached.
Repeat play
■To repeat a track
Press (RPT).
■To repeat all of the tracks on a CD (with a CD changer)
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
248
3-2. Using the audio system
Random playback
■Current CD
Press (RAND).
Tracks are played in a random order until is pressed once more.
■All CDs (with a CD changer)
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order until is
pressed once more.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track
no./Elapsed timeCD titleTrack name.
■Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding for 1
second or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.
If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed
for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
249
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press (RAND), (RPT) or again.
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem either with the CD or inside the
player. The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted upside
down.
“WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the
player. Wait for a while and then press . Contact
your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
250
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■CDs that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs or Dual Discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
●Type A: CDs that have a diameter other
than 4.7 in. (12 cm) or 3 in. (8 cm)
●Type B and C: CDs that have a diame-
ter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm)
●Low-quality and deformed CDs
●CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-
R labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
251
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
●Do not insert more than one CD at a
time.
252
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
P. 2 4 5
Selecting an MP3 and WMA disc (with a CD changer)
P. 2 4 7
Random playback
File selection
Repeat play
Playback
CD eject
Displaying
text
messages
CD selection (with a CD changer)
CD insert
(type B and C)
Search
playback
CD slot
Folder
selection
File selection
Reverse
Fast-forward
Power Volume
253
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting and scanning a folder
■Selecting folders one at a time
Press “” or “” on to select the desired folder.
■Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each
folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired
folder is reached, press once again.
■Returning to the first folder
Press and hold “” on until you hear a beep.
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting one file at a time
Turn or press “” or “” on to select the desired file.
■Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press .
When the desired file is reached, press once again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press (reverse) or (fast-for-
ward).
254
3-2. Using the audio system
Repeat play
■To repeat a file
Press (RPT).
■To repeat all of the files in a folder
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■To play files from a particular folder in random order
Press (RAND).
■To play all of the files on a disc in random order
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the order of
Folder no./File no./Elapsed timeFolder nameFile nameAlbum title
(MP3 only)Track titleArtist name.
255
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Display
P. 248
■Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
P. 249
■Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player.
The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the
player. Wait for a while and then press . Contact
your Toyota dealer if the CD still cannot be played back.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the
CD.
■Discs that can be used
P. 249
■CD player protection feature
P. 249
■If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
P. 249
■Lens cleaners
P. 249
256
3-2. Using the audio system
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media TM Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is
not finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the
disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
257
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-
essary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
258
3-2. Using the audio system
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may
not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTICE
■CDs that cannot be used
P. 250
■CD player precautions
P. 251
259
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Optimal use of the audio system
Displays the current mode
Changes the following set-
ting
●Sound quality and vol-
ume balance (P. 260)
The sound quality and bal-
ance setting can be
changed to produce the
best sound.
●Volume and tone quality
level (Automatic Sound
Levelizer) (P. 261)
260
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the audio control function
■Changing sound quality modes
Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following
order.
“BAS”“MID”*“TRE”“FAD”“BAL”“ASL”
*: Type C only
■Adjusting sound quality
Turning adjusts the level.
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or
CD mode.
Mode
displayed
Sound qual-
ity mode Level Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
“BAS”* Bass -5 to 5
Low High“MID”* Mid-range
(type C only) -5 to 5
“TRE”* Treble -5 to 5
“FAD”
Front/rear
volume
balance
R7 to F7 Shifts to rear Shifts to
front
“BAL”
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
261
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Type A and B
When “ASL” is selected, turning to the right changes the
“ASL” level in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and “HIGH”.
Turning to the left turns “ASL” off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehi-
cle speed.
Type C
When “ASL” is selected, turning to the right turns “ASL” on,
and turning to the left turns “ASL” off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the
noise level as you drive your vehicle.
■Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc. (type A)
The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS and SRS TruBass audio
enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes
except AM radio mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbols are trademarks of SRS Labs,
Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
262
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX adapter
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and lis-
ten to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
Press .
STEP
1
STEP
2
263
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Turning on the power
Press when the audio system is turned off.
The audio system can be turned off by holding down until you hear a
beep.
Changing the audio source
Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time is pressed.
Type A:
FM1FM2CDAUXAMSAT1SAT2SAT3
Type B and C:
FM1FM2CD changerAUXAMSAT1SAT2SAT3
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel.
Volume
Radio: Selects radio sta-
tions
CD: Selects tracks, files
(MP3 and WMA) and discs
Turns the power on, selects
audio source
: If equipped
264
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-
ume.
Press and hold to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Selecting a radio station
Press to select the radio mode.
Press “” or “” on to select a preset station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold until you hear a
beep.
Selecting a track/file
Press to select the CD mode.
Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file.
Selecting a folder (type A)
Press to select the CD mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
Selecting a disc in the CD player (with a CD changer)
Press to select the CD mode.
Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
265
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
266
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system (for cellular phone) features
■Conditions affecting operation
The hands-free phone system may not operate normally in the following situ-
ations:
●The cellular phone is turned off, or located outside the service area.
●The cellular phone has a low battery.
●The cellular phone is not connected to the system.
●The cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box, or metal mate-
rial covers or touches the phone.
■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed.
This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or
receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and
the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
Title Page
Using the hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone) P. 270
Making a phone call P. 278
Setting a cellular phone P. 284
Security and system setup P. 289
Using the phone book P. 292
: If equipped
267
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Required profiles for the cellular phone
●HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
●OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
If your cellular phone does not support HFP, the Bluetooth® phone cannot be
entered and OPP serviced cannot be provided separately.
■Trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■Certification for the hands-free phone system
FCC ID: ACJ932C5ZZZ035
IC ID: 216J-C5ZZZ035
MADE IN JAPAN/MEXICO
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
268
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. How-
ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
●Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
CAUTION:
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio fre-
quency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated
with at least 20 cm and more between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs).
Co-location:
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
269
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to a cellular phone
Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may
become high resulting in damage to the phone.
270
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Audio unit
Displays such items as
messages, name, and
phone number
Lower-case characters and
special characters, such as
an umlaut, cannot be dis-
played.
Selects items such as menu
or number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Press and hold: Displays
information that is too long
to be displayed at one time
on the screen
Selects speed dials
Displays the reception level
Displays Bluetooth® con-
nection condition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
hands-free phone system
cannot be used.
: If equipped
271
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Steering wheel telephone switches
Volume
The voice guidance volume
cannot be adjusted using
this button.
Hands-free phone system
off/ends a call/refuses a call
Hands-free phone system
on/starts a call
Press: Voice command sys-
tem on
Press and hold: Voice com-
mand system off
■Microphone
272
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Operating the system using a voice command
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker,
voice commands can be given to allow for operation of the hands-
free phone system without checking the display or operating .
■Operation procedure when using a voice command
Press and say a command for a desired function.
(P. 274)
■Auxiliary commands when using a voice command
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
Cancel: Exits the hands-free phone system
Repeat: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
Go back: Returns to the previous procedure
Help: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is
registered for the selected function
273
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register
a cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be
entered automatically when starting the system with no cellular
phone registered. Follow the procedure below to register a cellular
phone:
Press or .
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions
are heard.
Register a phone name by either of the following methods.
a. Select “Record Name” using , and say a name to be
registered.
b. Press and say a name to be registered.
A voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and a voice guidance instruction
for inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.
Input the passkey into the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-
ation of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
274
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■Normal operation
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
Callback - -
Dialing a number stored in
the incoming call history
memory
Redial - -
Dialing a number stored in
the outgoing call history
memory
Dial by
number - - Dialing by inputting a number
Dial by
name --
Dialing by inputting a name
registered in the phone book
Phonebook
Add Entry - Adding a new number
Change
Name -Changing a name in the
phone book
Delete
Entry - Deleting the phone book data
Delete
Speed
Dial
(Del Spd
Dial)
-Deleting a registered speed
dial
List
Names - Listing the phone book data
Set
Speed
Dial
(Speed
Dial)
- Registering a speed dial
275
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Setup
Security
Set PIN Setting a PIN code
Phonebook
Lock Locking the phone book
Phonebook
Unlock Unlocking the phone book
Phone
Setup
Pair Phone Registering the cellular
phone to be used
Change Name Changing a registered name
of a cellular phone
Delete Deleting a registered cellular
phone
List Phones Listing the registered cellular
phones
Select Phone Selecting a cellular phone to
be used
Set Passkey Changing the passkey
System
Setup
Guidance Vol-
ume
(Guidance Vol)
Setting voice guidance vol-
ume
Initialize Initialization
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
276
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Using a short cut key
First menu Second menu Operation detail
Dial “XXX (name)” - Dialing a number registered
in the phone book
Phone book add
entry - Adding a new number
Phone book change
name -
Changing the name of a
phone number in the phone
book
Phone book delete
entry - Deleting phone book data
Phone book list
names - Listing the phone book data
Phone book set
speed dial - Registering a speed dial
Phone book delete
speed dial - Deleting a speed dial
Phonebook Phonebook Unlock Unlocking the phone book
Phonebook Lock Locking the phone book
277
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Automatic adjustment of volume
When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically
increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■When using a voice command
●For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, #
(pound), (star), and + (plus).
●Say a command correctly and clearly.
■The system may not recognize your voice in the following situations:
●When driving on a rough road
●When driving at high speeds
●When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
●When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■The following cannot be performed while driving:
●Operating the system with
●Registering a cellular phone to the system
■Changing the passkey
P. 287
278
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Making a phone call
■Making a phone call
●Dialing by inputting a number
“Dial by number”
●Dialing by inputting a name
“Dial by name”
●Speed dialing
●Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
“Redial”
●Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
“Call back”
■Receiving a phone call
●Answering the phone
●Refusing the call
■Transferring a call
■Using the call history memory
●Dialing
●Storing data in the phone book
●Deleting
279
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Dialing by inputting a number
Press and say “Dial by number”.
Press and say the phone number.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press .
b. Press and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
280
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Dialing by inputting a name
Press and say “Dial by name”.
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press and say a registered name.
b. Press and say “List names”. Press while the
desired name is being read aloud.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press .
b. Press and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” using .
Speed dialing
Press .
Press the preset button in which the desired number is regis-
tered.
Press .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
281
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
When receiving a phone call
■Answering the phone
Press .
■Refusing the call
Press .
Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system
while dialing or receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the follow-
ing methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-
ation of the phone.
b. Press
*1.
c. Press and say “Call Transfer” *2.
*1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the cellular phone to the system during a call.
*2: While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from
the system to the cellular phone.
282
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use a number stored in the call history
memory:
Press and say “Redial” (when using a number stored
in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call back” (when
using a number stored in the incoming call history memory).
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is dis-
played.
b. Select the desired number using .
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press or select “Dial” using a voice command or
.
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” using a voice
command or .
Deleting: Select “Delete” using a voice command or .
STEP
1
STEP
2
283
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Call history
Up to 5 phone numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming
call history memories.
■When talking on the phone
●Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
●Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
284
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting a cellular phone
Registering a cellular phone
Select “Pair Phone” using a voice command or , and do the
procedure for registering a cellular phone. (P. 273)
Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows
the system to function. The following functions can be used for reg-
istered cellular phones:
■Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below using a
voice command or :
●Registering a cellular phone
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Pair Phone”
●Selecting the cellular phone to be used
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Select Phone”
●Changing a registered name
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Change Name”
●Listing the registered cellular phones
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “List Phones”
●Deleting a cellular phone
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Delete”
●Changing the passkey
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Set Passkey”
285
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Selecting the cellular phone to be used
Select “Select Phone” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the cellular phone to be used by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press and say the desired phone name.
b. Press and say “List phones”. While the name of the
desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press .
Pattern B
Select the cellular phone to be used using .
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .
Select the name of the cellular phone to be changed by one of
the following methods:
a. Press and say the desired phone name, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
286
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
b. Press and say “List phones”. While the desired
phone name is being read aloud, press .
c. Select the desired phone name using .
Press or select “Record Name” using , and say
a new name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
Listing the registered cellular phones
Selecting “List Phones” using a voice command or causes the
list of registered cellular phones to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing while the name of a cellular phone is being read
selects the cellular phone, and the following functions will be avail-
able:
• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete”
STEP
3
STEP
4
287
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Deleting a cellular phone
Select “Delete” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the cellular phone to be deleted by either of the follow-
ing methods and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press and say the name of the desired cellular
phone.
b. Press and say “List phones”. While the name of the
desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press .
Pattern B
Select the desired cellular phone to be deleted using .
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Press , say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm”
using a voice command or .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
288
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Pattern B
Select a 4 to 8-digit number using .
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press once again.
■The number of cellular phones that can be registered
Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.
STEP
2
STEP
3
289
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Security and system setup
Setting or changing the PIN
■Setting a PIN
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or .
Enter a PIN using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
■Changing the PIN
Select “Set PIN” using a voice command or .
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
■Security setting items and operation procedure
●Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Set PIN”
●Locking the phone book
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Lock”
●Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Unlock”
■System setup items and operation procedure
●Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Guidance Vol”
●Initialization
1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Initialize”
can only be used for system setup operation.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
290
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Enter the registered PIN using a voice command or .
Enter a new PIN using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
Select “Phonebook lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook unlock
(Phbk Unlock)” using a voice command or .
Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select
“Confirm” using a voice command or :
a. Press and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a registered PIN using .
Setting voice guidance volume
Select “Guidance Vol” using .
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
291
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Initialization
Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using .
Select “Confirm” using .
■Initialization
●The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming call history
• Speed dials
• Registered cellular phone data
• Security code
●Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored
to its original state.
■When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
●Dialing by inputting a name
●Speed dialing
●Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
●Using the phone book
STEP
1
STEP
2
292
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the phone book
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
●Inputting a phone number using a voice command
●Transferring data from the cellular phone
●Inputting a phone number using
●Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
●Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Add Entry”
●Setting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
●Changing a registered name
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Change Name”
●Deleting registered data
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Entry”
●Deleting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)”
●Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook” 2. “List Names”
293
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Adding procedure
Select “Add Entry” using a voice command or .
Use one of the following methods to input a phone number:
Inputting a phone number using a voice command
STEP2-1:Select “By Voice” using a voice command or .
STEP2-2:Press , say the desired number, and select
“Confirm” using a voice command.
Transferring data from the cellular phone
STEP2-1:Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using a voice
command or .
STEP2-2:Transfer the data from the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for
the details of transferring data.
STEP2-3:Select the data to be registered by either of the fol-
lowing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” using a voice
command.
b. Select the desired data using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
294
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Inputting a phone number using
STEP2-1:Select “Manual Input” using .
STEP2-2:Input a phone number using .
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
STEP2-3:When the entire number has been input, press
once again.
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming call history
STEP2-1:Select “Call History” using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2:Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using a voice com-
mand or .
STEP2-3:Select the data to be registered by either of the fol-
lowing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired
data is displayed, and select “Confirm” using a
voice command.
b. Select the desired data using .
295
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Select the name to be registered by either of the following
methods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
:
a. Press and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” using , and say the desired
name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
In , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Con-
firm” registers the newly added phone number as a speed dial.
Setting speed dials
Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” using a voice command
or .
Select the data to be registered as a speed dial by one of the
following methods:
a. Press , say desired name, and select “Confirm”
using a voice command or .
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
296
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
b. Press , and say “List names”. While the desired
name is being read aloud, press , and select “Con-
firm” using a voice command or .
c. Select the desired data using .
Select the desired preset button, and register the data into
speed dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” using
a voice command or .
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Name” using a voice command or .
Select the name to be changed by one of the following meth-
ods.
a. Press , say desired name, and select “Confirm”
using a voice command or .
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
297
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
b. Press , and say “List names”. While the desired
name is being read aloud, press , and select “Con-
firm” using a voice command or .
c. Select the desired name using .
Press or select “Record Name” using , and say
a new name.
Select “Confirm” using a voice command or .
Deleting registered data
Select “Delete Entry” using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select the data to be deleted by either of the following meth-
ods, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or :
a. Press , and say the name of the desired phone
number to be deleted.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
298
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
b. Press , say “List phones”. While the name of the
desired phone number is being read aloud, press .
Pattern B
Select the data to be deleted using .
Deleting speed dials
Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” using a voice com-
mand or .
Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is reg-
istered, and select “Confirm” using a voice command or
.
Listing the registered data
Selecting “List names” using a voice command causes a list of the
registered data to be read aloud.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.
Pressing while the desired data is being read aloud selects
the data, and the following function will be available.
• Dialing: “Dial”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
• Setting a speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
299
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
300
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Toyota is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist
in entering the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the
lights shown in the following illustration (except the luggage com-
partment light) automatically turn on/off according to the presence
of the electronic key (vehicles with smart key system), whether the
doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are opened/closed,
and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode or the engine switch
position.
The luggage compartment light turns on/off according to whether
the back door is opened/closed.
Interior light (P. 302)
Personal light main switch (P. 301)
Engine switch light
Foot lights (if equipped)
Luggage compartment light (turns on/off according to whether
the back door is opened/closed)
301
3-4. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
Personal/interior light main switch
Type A
Door position
The personal lights and interior
light come on when a door is
opened. They go off when the
doors are closed.
Off
The personal lights and interior
light can be individually turned on
or off.
Type B
Personal/interior lights
Type A
On/off
Personal/interior light main switch and personal/interior lights
302
3-4. Using the interior lights
Type B
On/off
Interior light
Door position
Off
On
Luggage compartment light
On
Off
Personal/interior lights and interior light and luggage compartment light
303
3-4. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
■To prevent battery discharge (excluding luggage compartment light)
If the lights remain on when a door is not fully closed and the personal/inte-
rior light main switch is in door position, the lights will go off automatically
after 20 minutes.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 491)
Luggage compartment light
304
3-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Cup holders
Bottle holders
Auxiliary box
Glove box
Overhead console
Console box
305
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Glove box
Unlock with the master key
(vehicles without smart key
system) or mechanical key
(vehicles with smart key sys-
tem)
Lock with the master key
(vehicles without smart key
system) or mechanical key
(vehicles with smart key sys-
tem)
Open (pull lever)
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Glove box
306
3-5. Using the storage features
Console box
Upper tray
Lift the lid.
Lower box
Pull the lever up and lift the lid.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Console box
307
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Overhead console
The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses
and similar small items.
Press in the lid.
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the overhead console
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses
may warp or become cracked.
■Caution while driving
Keep the overhead console closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■Items unsuitable for storing
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the overhead console to open and the items inside may
fall out, resulting in an accident.
Overhead console
309
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Bottle holders
Front seat
Second seat
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent
burns.
Cup holders and bottle holders
310
3-5. Using the storage features
Third seat
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
NOTICE
■Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-
tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.
Bottle holders
311
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Auxiliary box
To open and close the auxiliary
box, press the button.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■Operating the auxiliary box
If it is difficult to open or close the auxiliary box on a steep hill, move the
vehicle to a level place. To avoid damage to the auxiliary box, do not apply
excessive force to operate it.
Auxiliary box
312
3-6. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and
swing to the side.
Side extender:
Place in side position then
slide backwards.
313
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
314
3-6. Other interior features
Clock
■The clock is displayed when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
■When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system
Adjusts the hours.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest
hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 2:00
Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system
Adjusts the hours.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest
hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 2:00
315
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for a following component.
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
120 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W.
■12 V
Type A
Type B
Type C
316
3-6. Other interior features
■The power outlet can be used when
12V
●Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
●Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
120 VAC
●Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
●Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■120 VAC (if equipped)
Main switch
To use the power outlet,
turn on the main switch.
Power outlet socket
317
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
■To prevent the fuse from being blown
12V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
120 VAC
Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W.
If a 120 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the pro-
tection circuit will cut the power supply.
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
■Appliances that may not operate properly (120 VAC)
The following 120 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their
power consumption is under 100 W.
●Appliances with high initial peak wattage
●Measuring devices that process precise data
●Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
318
3-6. Other interior features
Seat heaters
■The seat heaters can be used when
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
Heats the driver’s seat
Heats the front passenger’s
seat
The indicator light is on while
the seat heater is operating.
Push the switch once again to
turn off the seat heater.
: If equipped
319
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp
objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
320
3-6. Other interior features
Armrest
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
To use the armrest, pull the
strap forward and fold down
the center seatback.
321
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Coat hooks
CAUTION
■Items that must not be hung on the hook (vehicles with SRS curtain
shield airbags)
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that
cause death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the coat hook
Do not place too much load on the coat hook.
322
3-6. Other interior features
Floor mat
CAUTION
■When inserting the floor mat
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the
movement of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.
●Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the
correct side faces upward.
●Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the car-
pet.
Secure the driver's floor mat
using the hooks provided.
323
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Luggage compartment features
■Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■Grocery bag hooks
■Storage box (vehicles without third seats)
Type A
The rear deck board can be folded up into two positions.
Lift the rear deck board.
STEP
1
324
3-6. Other interior features
Fold up the deck board.
The lid can be removed.
Type B
Lift the front deck board.
STEP
2
325
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■Luggage cover (if equipped)
Attach the hooks to the head
restraints.
If necessary, move the second
seats to enable the hook
engagement.
Pull out the luggage cover and
hook onto the anchors.
STEP
1
STEP
2
326
3-6. Other interior features
■Rear cargo net (if equipped)
Pattern A
Insert the left end of the
pipe into the hole.
Compress the right end of
the pipe and insert it into the
hole.
Pattern B
327
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Removing the luggage cover (if equipped)
The luggage cover can be removed by following the procedure
below.
Detach the hooks of the luggage cover.
Compress the end of the lug-
gage cover and lift the luggage
cover up.
Pattern C
Pattern D
STEP
1
STEP
2
328
3-6. Other interior features
Stowing the luggage cover (if equipped)
Open the rear deck board and
remove the deck side cover.
Insert the right end of the lug-
gage cover into the recess, then
compress the left end of the lug-
gage cover and insert it into the
recess.
STEP
1
STEP
2
329
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Stowing the rear cargo net (if equipped)
Open the rear deck board and remove the deck side cover.
(P. 328)
Insert the right end of the pipe
into the recess, then compress
the left end of the pipe and insert
it into the recess.
Stowing the luggage cover and rear cargo net (if equipped) together
Stow the rear cargo net before
stowing the luggage cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
330
3-6. Other interior features
CAUTION
■When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.
■Caution while driving
●Do not drive with any of the deck boards opened. Items may fall out and
cause injury.
●Do not place anything on the luggage cover to avoid death or serious
injury.
■When installing/stowing the luggage cover and rear cargo net
Make sure that the luggage cover and rear cargo net is securely installed/
stowed. Failure to do so may result in serious injury in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
■Using the rear cargo net
Observe the following precautions to avoid death or serious injury.
●Do not climb on or hang on the net.
●Do not place anything on the net higher than the rear seatbacks. Items
may be thrown out of the rear cargo net in the event of an accident or sud-
den braking.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the grocery bag hooks
Do not hang heavy loads on the hooks.
■Using the rear cargo net
●Do not place fragile items on the net.
●Do not place anything heavier than 22.1lb. (10kg) on the net.
Maintenance and care 4
331
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior......... 332
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.......... 335
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements.................. 338
General maintenance....... 340
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs........................ 343
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions .................... 344
Hood ................................ 348
Positioning a floor jack ..... 350
Engine compartment........ 352
Tires ................................. 368
Tire inflation pressure ...... 375
Wheels ............................. 380
Air conditioning filter......... 382
Key battery....................... 384
Checking and replacing
fuses .............................. 388
Light bulbs........................ 400
332
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
■Automatic car washes
●Before washing the vehicle, do the following.
• Fold the mirrors back.
• Remove the antenna.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
●Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition.
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
333
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
■Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■To prevent deterioration and body corrosion
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects or bird droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
CAUTION
■Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
334
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms
When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side
wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning
the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.
335
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:
■Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■Cleaning the leather areas
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-
gent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-
ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated
area.
■Synthetic leather areas
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
336
4-1. Maintenance and care
■Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply
water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi-
ble.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause electrical
components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 9 7 )
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
337
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or alka-
line solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the
vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces.
●Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and
may also cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the windows clean. Wipe the windows
in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
338
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.
■General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis.
This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
■Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified inter-
vals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
339
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
●Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.
CAUTION
■Warning in handling of battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (P. 363)
340
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery Maintenance-free. (P. 363)
Brake fluid At the correct level? (P. 361)
Engine coolant At the correct level? (P. 360)
Engine oil At the correct level? (P. 355)
Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 361)
Washer fluid At the correct level? (P. 367)
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that
any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your
Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
341
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clear-
ance and correct amount of free
play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when
applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock
securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system oper-
ate smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats • Do the seat controls operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
342
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors • Operate smoothly?
Engine hood • The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after park-
ing?
Tires
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or dam-
aged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
343
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-
tors the operation of the emission control system.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
■Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
●When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-
function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
344
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedures as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 363)
•Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 361)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine coolant level (P. 360)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized
water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
Engine oil level P. 355)
• Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel
(used only for adding oil)
345
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Items Parts and tools
Fuses (P. 388) • Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Radiator and condenser
(P. 361)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 375) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 367)
• Water washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
Light bulb (P. 400)
• Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
• Flathead screwdriver
346
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■When working on the engine compartment
●Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fans and engine
drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
●Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with
clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
■When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Vehicles without smart key system: Be sure the engine switch is OFF. With
the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may auto-
matically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tempera-
ture is high. (P. 361)
Vehicles with smart key system: Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is OFF. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the
electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on
and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 361)
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in the eyes.
347
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due
to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compart-
ment.
348
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Lift the hood catch and lift the
hood.
Hold the hood open by insert-
ing the supporting rod into the
slot.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
349
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
NOTICE
■When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
350
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■Front
■Rear
351
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or seri-
ous injury.
●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported
only by the floor jack.
Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface.
●Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
●Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift
the shift lever in P.
●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage
the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath
the floor jack.
●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustra-
tion.
352
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Fuse boxes (P. 388)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 360)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 356)
Battery (P. 363)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 361)
Radiator (P. 361)
Condenser (P. 361)
Electric cooling fans
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 355)
Washer fluid tank (P. 367)
353
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Fuse boxes (P. 388)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 360)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 356)
Battery (P. 363)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 361)
Radiator (P. 361)
Condenser (P. 361)
Electric cooling fans
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 355)
Washer fluid tank (P. 367)
354
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover
■Removing the engine compartment cover
■Installing the clips
355
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine,
wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the
bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
Low
Full
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
356
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Low
Full
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as already in
the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
The approximate quantity of oil needed to raise the level from low to full on
the dipstick is indicated as follows:
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)
Oil grade ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
Items Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
357
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Recommended viscosity
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
5W-20, 0W-20
*1:SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine
oil may be used. However,
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice
for good fuel economy, and
good starting in cold weather.
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy, and good
starting in cold weather.
*2:If SAE 5W-30 oil is not avail-
able, SAE 10W-30 oil may be
used. However, it should be
replaced with SAE 5W-30 at
the next oil change.
■How to read oil container labels
Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that
help you to select the proper oil.
Outside temperature
*1
Outside temperature
*2
358
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Engine oil consumption
●The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
●More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
●A new engine consumes more oil.
●When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-
rately.
●Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per
1000 km)
●If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600
miles (1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.
■Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
To reset the oil change system, follow the procedure below:
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch off with the trip meter A reading shown.
(P. 156)
While pressing the trip meter reset button, turn the engine switch to
the “ON” position.
Press and hold the button until the trip meter displays “000000”.
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off with the trip meter A
reading shown. (P. 156)
While pressing the trip meter reset button, turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode.
Press and hold the button until the trip meter displays “000000”.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
359
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
360
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line.
■If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.
361
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser, and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
Brake fluid
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
“MAX”
“MIN”
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and may cause
burns.
362
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Adding fluid
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking effi-
ciency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
363
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Battery
■Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Ter mi na ls
Hold-down clamp
■Checking battery condition
Check the battery condition using the indicator color.
Type A
Blue: Good condition
White: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Red: Not working properly.
Have the battery checked by
your Toyota dealer.
364
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type B
Green: Good condition
Dark: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
Clear or light yellow: Not
working properly. Have the
vehicle checked by your
Toyota dealer.
■Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
■After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with smart key sys-
tem)
In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to ini-
tialize the system.
Shift the shift lever to P, and turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF.
Open and close any of the doors.
Start the engine. (If the engine does not start first time, repeat the
procedure.)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●Keep children away from the battery.
■Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
366
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia,
beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immedi-
ately.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
367
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Washer fluid
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
Add washer fluid in the following
situations.
●Any washer does not work.
●The low washer fluid warning
light comes on.
For vehicles sold in Canada
If any washer does not work or the low windshield washer fluid warn-
ing light comes on, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.
CAUTION
■When filling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the
washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
368
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
■Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and inflation pressure if not
rotated.
■Tire rotation
Vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed
tires
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
Front
369
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Except vehicles with a spare tire of the same wheel type as the
installed tires
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
■The tire pressure warning system (if equipped)
Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that
uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low
tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 425)
Front
370
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota
dealer. (P. 370)
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your
Toyota dealer.
371
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■When to replace your vehicle's tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage.
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage.
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of
the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (P. 480)
372
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use
year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (P. 206)
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCG
IC ID: 3729A-PMV107J
IC ID: 1551A-13BCG
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so
may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous han-
dling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
●Do not tow the vehicle with the spare tire installed.
374
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■Do not use puncture sealant sprays to repair flats (vehicles with a
tire pressure warning system)
Puncture sealant sprays may damage tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters.
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels
and body.
■If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type B
377
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended
levels, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla-
tion pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride
and handling.
●Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal
for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.
379
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident
causing death or serious injury.
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have
been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
380
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of
handling control.
■Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
■Aluminum wheel precautions
●Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
●Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
381
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■When replacing wheels (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must be installed. (P. 370)
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing serious
injury or death.
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles
with a tire pressure warning system)
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by
your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make
sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at
your Toyota dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
382
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
■Removal method
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
off.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
Push in each side of the glove
box to disconnect the claws.
Remove the filter cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
383
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace it if necessary.
NOTICE
■When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
■Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The“UP” marks shown on the
filter should be pointing up.
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver (To prevent damage to the key, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.)
●Small Phillips-head screwdriver
●Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without smart key system)
or CR1632 (vehicles with smart key system)
■Replacing the battery (vehicles without smart key system)
Remove the cover.
Remove the module.
STEP
1
STEP
2
385
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
■Replacing the battery (vehicles with smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur.
●The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function prop-
erly.
●The operational range is reduced.
■Use a CR2016 (vehicles without smart key system) or CR1632 (vehicles
with smart key system) lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera
stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your
Toyota dealer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
STEP
3
387
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
388
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
off.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
The fuses are located in the following places. To check the
fuses, follow the instructions below.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Type A: Push the tab in and lift
the lid off.
Type B: Push the tab in and lift
the lid off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
390
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
391
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
Type E
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
392
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■Engine compartment
Type A (passenger’s side)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse
2 SPARE 20 A Spare fuse
3 SPARE 10 A Spare fuse
4 ECU-B2 7.5 A Air conditioning system, power win-
dows, smart key system
5 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
6 STR LOCK 20 A Smart key system
7 RAD No.1 20 A Audio system
393
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
8 ECU-B 10 A
Gauges and meters, clock, main
body ECU, wireless remote control,
smart key system, audio system,
front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system, ABS, TRAC,
Enhanced VSC system, “AUTO
LSD”, downhill assist control sys-
tem, hill-start assist control system,
Active torque control 4WD system
9 DOME 10 A
Vanity lights, personal/interior
lights, interior light, luggage com-
partment light, engine switch light,
foot lights
10 H-LP LH 10 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
11 H-LP RH 10 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
12 H-LP LL 10 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
13 H-LP RL 10 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
14 AC INV 15 A AC inverter
15 TOWING*130 A No circuit
16 DEICER 20 A Windshield wiper deicer
17 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system
18 PTC NO.3 50 A No circuit
19 PTC NO.2 50 A No circuit
20 PTC NO.1 50 A No circuit
21 HEAD MAIN 50 A “H-LP LH”, “H-LP RH”, “H-LP LL”,
“H-LP RL” fuses
22 RDI*230 A Electric cooling fan
FAN 2*150 A
Fuse Ampere Circuit
394
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
*1: Vehicles with towing package
*2: Vehicles with 2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
*3: Vehicles with 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Type B (driver’s side)
23 CDS*230 A Electric cooling fan
FAN 1*350 A
24 H-LP CLN 30 A No circuit
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 AMP 30 A Audio system
2 AM2 30 A Starting system
3 IG2 15 A
Starting system, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multi-
port fuel injection system
4 HAZ 10 A Emergency flashers
5 ETCS 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
395
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
6 AM2-2 7.5 A Starting system
7 EFI NO.1 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
8 EFI NO.2 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
9 EFI NO.3 7.5 A No circuit
10 GROW 80 A No circuit
11 EPMS 60 A Electric power steering system
12 MAIN 80 A
“HEAD MAIN”, “ECU-B2”, “ALT-S”,
“STR LOCK”, “DOME”, “ECU-B”,
“RAD NO.1” fuses
13 ALT
120 A*1
“ABS 1”, “ABS 2”, “RDI”*3, “CDS”*3,
“FAN 1”*4, “AC INV”, “TOWING”,
“HTR”, “DEICER” fuses
140 A*2
“ABS 1”, “ABS 2”, “FAN1”, “FAN2”,
“AC INV”, “TOWING”, “HTR”,
“DEICER” fuses
14 P/I 50 A “EFI MAIN”, “HORN”, “A/F”, fuses
15 ABS2 30 A
ABS, TRAC, Enhanced VSC,
“AUTO LSD” function, downhill
assist control system, hill-start
assist control system
16 ABS1 50 A
ABS, TRAC, Enhanced VSC,
“AUTO LSD” function, downhill
assist control system, hill-start
assist control system
17 EFI MAIN 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, “EFI NO.1”, “EFI NO.2”,
fuses
18 HORN 10 A Horn
Fuse Ampere Circuit
396
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
*1: Vehicles without towing package
*2: Vehicles with towing package
*3: Vehicles with 2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
*4: Vehicles with 3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
■Under the instrument panel
19 EDU 25 A No circuit
20 A/F 20 A A/F sensor, fuel pump*3
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 TAIL 10 A
Parking lights, tail lights, license
plate light, front fog lights, rear side
marker lights
2 PANEL 7.5 A Clock, instrument panel lights,
audio system
3 GAUGE 1 10 A Back-up lights, charging system
4 D FR DOOR 20 A Power windows (front doors)
5 RL DOOR 20 A Power windows
6 RR DOOR 20 A Power windows
7 S/ROOF 25 A Electric moon roof
8 CIG 15 A Power outlet
Fuse Ampere Circuit
397
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
9 ACC 7.5 A
Audio system, power outlets,
power rear view mirror control,
automatic transmission shift lock
system, main body ECU, clock,
smart key system
10 MIR HTR 10 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers
11 PWR OUTLET 15 A Power outlet
12 RR FOG 10 A No circuit
13 IGN 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, steering lock system, front
passenger occupant classification
system, smart key system, SRS
airbag system
14 GAUGE 2 7.5 A Gauges and meters
15 S-HTR 15 A Seat heaters
16 FR WIP 25 A Windshield wipers
17 RR WIP 15 A Rear window wiper
18 WSH 15 A Windshield washer, rear window
washer
19 ECU IG 1 10 A
Electric cooling fan, ABS, TRAC,
Enhanced VSC, “AUTO LSD” func-
tion, downhill assist control system,
hill-start assist control system,
active torque control 4WD system,
automatic transmission shift lock
system, air conditioning system,
main body ECU, electric moon
roof, stop/tail lights, electric power
steering system, clock, AC inverter,
auto anti-glare inside rear view mir-
ror
20 ECU IG 2 10 A Air conditioning system, rear win-
dow defogger, emergency flashers
Fuse Ampere Circuit
398
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
*: Vehicles without smart key system
21 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system
22 STOP 10 A
Stop/tail lights, high mounted stop-
light, automatic transmission shift
lock system, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, ABS, TRAC,
Enhanced VSC, “AUTO LSD” sys-
tem, downhill assist control system,
hill-start assist control system
23 DOOR 25 A Main body ECU, power door lock
system
24 ACC-B 25 A “ACC”, “CIG”, fuses
25 4WD 7.5 A Active torque control 4WD system
26 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights
27 AM1* 7.5 A Starting system
28 DEF 30 A Rear window defogger, “MIR HTR”
fuse
29 P/SEAT 30 A Power seat
30 POWER 30 A Power windows
Fuse Ampere Circuit
399
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacement. (P. 400)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
400
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Toyota dealer.
■Preparing a light bulb for replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 476)
■Removing the engine compartment cover
P. 354
■Front bulb locations
Headlight
low beam
Front turn signal, parking and
front side marker lights
Headlight high beam
Front fog lights
(if equipped)
401
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Rear bulb locations
Vehicles without a spare tire
Vehicles with a spare tire
Rear turn signal and back-up lights License plate
lights
Rear side marker lights
Rear turn signal and back-up lights
License plate
light
Rear side marker lights
402
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■Headlights
Right side only: Remove the clip
and move it aside to allow easy
access to the light bulbs.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Headlight (low beam)
Headlight (high beam)
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
403
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Reinstalling the clip
■Front turn signal, parking and front side marker lights
Right side only: Remove the clip
and move it aside to allow easy
access to the light bulbs.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
404
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Reinstalling the clip
■Front fog lights (if equipped)
Turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the front fog
light that you wish to replace.
For example, if you wish to
replace the front fog light on the
right side, turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Remove the clip using a flathead
screwdriver wrapped in a rag.
Move section “A” of the fender
liner to the inner side of the vehi-
cle, partly removing it and
thereby allowing access to the
front fog light.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
405
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
To unplug the connector,
depress the lock release while
pulling downward.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
■Back-up lights, rear turn signal and rear side marker lights
Open the back door (P. 46)
and remove the cover.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Back-up light
Rear turn signal light
Rear side marker light
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
406
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the light bulb.
Back-up light
Rear turn signal light
Rear side marker light
■License plate lights
Vehicles without a spare tire
Remove the cover as shown in
the illustration.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicles with a spare tire
Use a flathead screwdriver to
disengage the side of the lamp.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
■Light other than the above
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
●High mounted stoplight
●Stop/tail lights
●Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
408
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
●Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
■LED side turn signal lights, stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight
The side turn signal lights (if equipped), stop/tail lights and high mounted
stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take
your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
When trouble arises 5
409
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ......... 410
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ............................. 411
If you think something
is wrong ......................... 418
Fuel pump shut off
system ........................... 419
Event data recorder ......... 420
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ....................... 422
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with standard
tires)............................... 434
If you have a flat tire
(vehicles with run-flat
tires)............................... 450
If the engine will not
start................................ 451
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P............ 453
If you lose your keys ........ 454
If the electronic key does
not operate properly
(vehicles with smart
key system).................... 455
If the battery is
discharged ..................... 457
If your vehicle
overheats ....................... 460
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................. 463
410
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is
involved in an accident.
Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, press the switch
once again.
5
When trouble arises
411
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer before towing.
●The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
Towing eyelet
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
2WD models: If towing from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and
axles must be in good conditions. (P. 415)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
412
5-1. Essential information
■Emergency towing procedure
Release the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch to “ACC”
(engine off) or “ON” (engine running) position.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to ACCESSORY (engine off) or IGNITION ON (engine run-
ning) mode.
CAUTION
■Caution while towing
●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive
stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains.
●If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
413
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelet
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the
illustration.
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by
hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut
wrench.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
■Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 434
414
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This
may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
5
When trouble arises
415
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck from the front
2WD models
Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
■To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
416
5-1. Essential information
4WD models
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck from the rear
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
NOTICE
■To prevent damaging the vehicle
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission (4WD models)
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
5
When trouble arises
417
5-1. Essential information
Using a flat bed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
418
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
5
When trouble arises
419
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an air-
bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops sup-
plying fuel to the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
420
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a
near car crash event, this device may record some or all of the follow-
ing information:
●Engine speed
●Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
●Vehicle speed
●To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
●Position of the transmission shift lever
●Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
●Driver's seat position
●SRS airbag deployment data
●SRS airbag system diagnostic data
●Front passenger's occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of
improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders,
the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between
passengers.
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects
of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining
optimal vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is an event
data recorder (EDR) that records data in a crash or a near car
crash event.
5
When trouble arises
421
5-1. Essential information
Disclosure of the data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
●An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for
a leased vehicle) is obtained
●Officially requested by the police or other authorities
●Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
●Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Toyota will:
●Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety performance
●Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without dis-
closing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed
necessary
●Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification informa-
tion to a non-Toyota organization for research purposes
422
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
The buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with
the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn
on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
5
When trouble arises
423
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The emission control system;
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system.
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
424
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
“ABS” warning light
Indicates a malfunction in.
• The ABS;
• The brake assist system.
Electric power steering warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system.
(Comes on)
Active torque control 4WD system warning light (4WD
models)
Indicates a malfunction in the active torque control 4WD
system.
(When the light flashes. P. 425)
Warning light Warning light/Details
5
When trouble arises
425
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
Indicates that a door is not
fully closed.
Check that all doors are
closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Indicates that remaining
fuel is about 2.4 gal. (9.0
L, 2.0 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)*
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(on the center
panel)
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)*
Warns the front passen-
ger to fasten his or her
seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(Flashes)
Active torque control 4WD
system warning light
(4WD models)
Indicates that the driveline
temperature is too high.
(When the light comes on.
P. 423)
Reduce vehicle speed (until
the light goes off) or stop
the vehicle at a safe place
and allow the engine to idle
until the light goes off.
426
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Automatic transmission
fluid temperature warning
light (if equipped)
Indicates that the auto-
matic transmission fluid
temperature is too high.
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and shift the shift
lever to P.
If the light does not go off,
contact your Toyota dealer.
Low washer fluid warning
light
Low level of washer fluid
Fill the tank.
(U.S.A.)
Engine oil replacement
reminder light
Illuminates for about 3 sec-
onds and then flashes for
about 15 seconds approxi-
mately 4500 miles (7200
km) after the engine oil is
changed: Indicates that the
engine oil is scheduled to be
changed.
Check the engine oil, and
change it if necessary.
Comes on and remains on if
the distance driven exceeds
5000 miles (8000 km): Indi-
cates that the engine oil
should be changed.
Check and change the
engine oil.
Tire pressure warning
light (if equipped)
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
Adjust the tire inflation
pressure.
When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system
Have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
427
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzers:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzers sound to alert
the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The
buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the
buzzer will sound at a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with smart key system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
Once (Comes
on for 8
seconds.)
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the electronic
key is not present when the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is pressed.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key*.
Once
3 times
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that a door other
than the driver’s door has
been opened and closed with
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other
than OFF and the electronic
key has been taken out of
the detection area.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
428
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehi-
cle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be diffi-
culties receiving the signal from the key. (P. 3 0 )
Once
3 times
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s door
has been opened and closed
with the shift lever in P, the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other than
OFF and the electronic key
has been taken out of the
detection area.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
OFF or con-
firm the loca-
tion of the
electronic
key.
Continuous
Continuous
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s door
has been opened and closed
with the shift lever not in P, the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other than
OFF and the electronic key
has been taken out of the
detection area.
• Shift the shift
lever to P.
• Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
5
When trouble arises
429
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passen-
ger is not sitting in the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-
ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■Changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only)
Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 358)
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire
pressure warning light.
■The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temper-
ature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire (vehicles with a tire pres-
sure warning system)
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation
pressure of the spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire, the tire pressure warning light does
not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the
proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off
after a few minutes.
430
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters are used.
●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
●If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or
higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies
are nearby.
●If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the
wheels or wheel housings.
●If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota
wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)
●If tire chains are used.
●If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal
reception.
●If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is
put in the luggage compartment.
5
When trouble arises
431
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1
minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after flashing for 1 minute fre-
quently when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch is
turned ON, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 491) However, Toyota recommends that the
seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passen-
ger that the seat belts are not fastened.
CAUTION
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Vehicles with run-flat tires:
• Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible.
Do not drive over 55 mph (90 km/h).
• Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation
pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have
the tire replaced by the nearest Toyota dealer.
• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deterio-
rate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
●Vehicles with standard tires:
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the
tire inflation pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation
pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check
the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat
tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deterio-
rate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
432
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
5
When trouble arises
433
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat-
ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pres-
sure warning system may not operate properly.
434
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with standard tires)
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■Before jacking up the vehicle
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to P.
●Stop the engine.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Spare
tire
Tool bag Jack
5
When trouble arises
435
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
Disengage the claws and
remove the cover.
Loosen
Tighten
Loosen and take out the jack.
STEP
1
STEP
2
436
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the tool bag
Disengage the claws and
remove the cover.
Take out the tool bag.
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
437
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire (vehicles with the spare tire cover)
Open the back door. Unlock the
latch handle which on the bottom
of the spare tire cover.
Remove the spare tire cover.
When placing the spare tire
cover on the ground, make sure
the cover design side faces up
to avoid scratching the cover
surface.
Close the back door.
Using the wheel nut wrench,
loosen the hold-down nuts by
turning them counterclockwise
until they can be loosened by
hand. Follow the order shown in
the illustration.
Remove all the wheel nuts and the spare tire.
When placing the spare tire on the ground, make sure the wheel
design side faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
438
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire (vehicles without the spare tire cover)
Using the wheel nut wrench,
loosen the hold-down nuts by
turning them counterclockwise
until they can be loosened by
hand. Follow the order shown in
the illustration.
Remove all the wheel nuts and the spare tire.
When placing the spare tire on the ground, make sure the wheel
design side faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Remove the wheel ornament using the wheel nut wrench as
shown below.
16-inch wheel
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wrench
and the wheel ornament, as
shown in the illustration.
STEP
1
Flat tire
Wheel
chock posi-
tions
Front
Left-
hand
side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side
tire
Right-
hand
side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side
tire
Rear
Left-
hand
side
In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire
Right-
hand
side
In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire
STEP
2
440
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
17-inch and 18-inch wheels
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
441
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
STEP
5
STEP
6
442
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, and the tire may
come off the vehicle.
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Replacing a steel wheel with a steel wheel
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
STEP
1
STEP
2
Tapered portion
Disc
wheel
seat
Tapered portion
Disc
wheel
seat
5
When trouble arises
443
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel
Turn the nut washers until they
come into contact with the disc
wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Disc wheel
Washer
STEP
3
STEP
4
444
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Reinstall the wheel ornament.
16-inch wheel
17-inch and 18-inch wheels
Stowing the flat tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the disc wheel seat
and the wheel contact surface.
Vehicles with aluminum wheels
and a steel wheel for the spare:
Remove the plastic rings from
the wheel nuts of the spare tire
carrier.
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
445
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Close the back door.
Stow the flat tire on the back door and tighten all wheel nuts
by hand.
Using the wheel nut wrench,
tighten the hold-down nuts by
turning them clockwise. Follow
the order shown in the illustra-
tion.
Tightening torque:
66.4 ft•lbf (90 N•m, 9.1 kgf•m)
Open the back door.
Upper slots
Hooks
To install the spare tire cover,
insert the hooks under the
guides to the upper slots and
lower the cover.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
446
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Attach the cover by hooking the
2 inner protrusions.
Check that the cover is securely
attached.
Hook
Latch handle
Clasp
Open the back door and lock
the latch handle which is on
the bottom of the cover.
Stow the jack and all tools securely, and replace all the cov-
ers.
STEP
8
STEP
9
■When reinstalling the wheel ornament (vehicles with 16-inch
wheels)
■After completing the tire change (vehicles with a tire pressure
warning system)
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 370)
STEP
10
Align the cutout of the wheel ornament
with the valve stem as shown.
5
When trouble arises
447
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■After repairing the flat tire (vehicles with aluminum wheels and a
steel wheel for the spare)
Be sure to reinstall the plastic rings to the wheel nuts before stowing the
spare tire. If the steel wheel is stowed without reinstalling the plastic
rings to the wheel nuts, the spare tire carrier may produce abnormal
noise when the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to
the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
●Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake
and put the transmission in “P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to
the one being changed if necessary.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle will be injured.
448
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious
injury:
●Do not try to remove the ornament by hand. Take due care in handling
the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a
serious accident. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or
wheel nuts.
●Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103
N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and
the wheel may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death
or serious injury.
●Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
●Make sure that the rubber rings are not installed to the wheel nuts for
aluminum wheel. Otherwise, the nuts may become loose and the
wheel may fall off, which may cause a serious accident.
5
When trouble arises
449
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■When replacing the tires (vehicles with a tire pressure warning sys-
tem)
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters (vehicles with a tire pressure warning system)
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
450
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire (vehicles with run-flat tires)
■In some condition (such as at high temperatures)
You cannot continue driving for up to 100 miles (160 km).
■If you cannot distinguish between the standard tires and run-flat
tires
Consult your Toyota dealer.
■For the detailed information on run-flat tires
See the tire warranty book.
NOTICE
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
Take your vehicle to the nearest Toyota dealer or authorized tire
dealer as soon as possible.
■Run-flat tires (A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the
sidewall)
You can continue driving a
vehicle with run-flat tires even
if any tire goes flat.
It is possible to run for a max-
imum of 100 miles (160 km)
at a speed below 55 mph (90
km/h) after the tire pressure
warning light comes on.
(P. 422)
5
When trouble arises
451
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures
are being followed (P. 143, 147) or releasing the steering lock, (P.
143, 147), consider each of the following points.
■The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-
ates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
●The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 143, 147)
●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 9 2 )
■The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 457)
●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with smart
key system).
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. How-
ever, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(P. 452)
452
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 457)
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehi-
cles with smart key system).
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
5
When trouble arises
453
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
to the “LOCK” position.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch off.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flat-
head screwdriver or equiva-
lent.
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
454
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer.
For vehicles with the smart key system, bring the other key and the
key number stamped on the key number plate.
For vehicles without the smart key system, bring a master key and
the key number stamped on the key number plate.
5
When trouble arises
455
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors with the mechanical key
Using the mechanical key (P. 24)
in order to perform the following
operations:
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Turning the key unlock the
driver’s door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
If any of the doors is opened and
closed while the key is being
touched to the switch, an alarm
will sound to indicate that the start
function cannot detect the elec-
tronic key.
If communication between the electronic key and the vehicle is inter-
rupted (P. 30) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote con-
trol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and back door can be
opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure
below.
STEP
1
STEP
2
456
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 5
seconds after the buzzer sounds, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be
changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 144)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be
operated, contact your Toyota dealer.
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as
you normally do when stopping the engine.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 385)
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
457
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-
cle's battery is discharged.
You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following
the steps below.
Connecting the jumper cables
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system — Open and close any of
the doors with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
458
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■To prevent battery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned
off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle, and turn
the engine switch to the “ON” position (vehicles without
smart key system) or turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key sys-
tem), to start the vehicle's engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
459
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
●Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it
is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-
nal.
●Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” ter-
minals.
●Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery.
●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
●Do not lean over the battery.
●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans
or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
460
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam
subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the
engine.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine and call your Toyota dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
5
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
461
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
●The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of
power is experienced.
●Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-
ing serious injury such as burns.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the
engine is running.
●Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are
hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is
unavailable. (P. 472)
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
STEP
5
462
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.
5
When trouble arises
463
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
●If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may
require towing to be freed.
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P.
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
4WD models: Activate 4WD lock mode. (P. 192)
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully
depress the accelerator pedal to free the vehicle.
Turn off TRAC and/or Enhanced VSC if these functions are ham-
pering your attempts to free the vehicle. (P. 182)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
464
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
466
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length
178.7 in. (4540 mm)*1
180.7 in. (4590 mm)*2
180.9 in. (4595 mm)*3
181.1 in. (4600 mm)*4
181.9 in. (4620 mm)*5
Overall width
Without over fender
71.5 in. (1815 mm)
With over fender
73.0 in. (1855 mm)
Overall height*6
Without roof rails
66.3 in. (1685 mm)
66.5 in. (1690 mm)*7
With roof rails
68.7 in. (1745 mm)
69.1 in. (1755 mm)*7
Wheelbase 104.7 in. (2660 mm)
Front tread 61.4 in. (1560 mm)
61.8 in. (1570 mm)*4
Rear tread 61.4 in. (1560 mm)
61.8 in. (1570 mm)*4
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
825 lb. (375 kg)
1155 lb. (525 kg)*7
467
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
*1: Without spare tire
*2: 215/70R16 tires
*3: 225/65R17 tires
*4: 235/55R18 tires
*5: With spare tire cover
*6: Unladen vehicle
*7: With third seats
*8: With towing package
Towing capacity
(Trailer weight + cargo)
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
1500 lb. (680 kg)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
2000 lb. (907 kg)
3500 lb. (1588 kg)*8
468
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification
■Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
On some models, this number is also stamped under the front pas-
senger’s seat.
This number is also on the Certi-
fication Label.
469
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Engine
Model 2AR-FE 2GR-FE
Type 4-cylinder in line,
4-cycle, gasoline
6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.54 3.86 in.
(90.0 98.0 mm)
3.70 3.27 in.
(94.0 83.0 mm)
Displacement 152.2 cu.in. (2494 cm3) 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
470
6-1. Specifications
Fuel
Lubrication system
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 15.9 gal. (60 L, 13.2 lmp.gal.)
Oil capacity
Drain and refill (Refer-
ence)
Without filter
With filter
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp.qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp.qt.)
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
4.7 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp.qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.4 Imp.qt.)
Oil grade ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
471
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
*1: 0W-20 is the oil that provides the optimal level of fuel efficiency.
*2: 5W-30 is the oil that provides the optimal level of fuel efficiency.
Oil viscosity
●The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic
of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before
the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
●The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its oper-
ating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited
if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load con-
ditions.
Recommended oil
viscosity
Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the grade and vis-
cosity shown below.
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
Outside temperature
*1
Outside temperature
*2
472
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
*: With towing package
Ignition system
Capacity (Reference)
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
7.2 qt. (6.8 L, 6.0 Imp.qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
9.4 qt. (8.9 L, 7.8 Imp.qt.)
9.8 qt. (9.3 L, 8.2 Imp.qt.)*
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and
non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
Gap
2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE) engine
DENSO, SK16HR11
3.5 L V6 (2GR-FE) engine
DENSO FK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning the
engine.
473
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Electrical system
Rear differential (4WD models)
Automatic transaxle
Battery
Open voltage* at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(*: Voltage is checked 20 minutes
after the engine and all the lights are
turned off)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Oil capacity 0.5 qt. (0.5 L, 0.4 Imp. qt.)
Oil type Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Recommended oil viscosity
Above 0F (-18C): SAE 90
Below 0F (-18C): SAE 80W or SAE
80W-90
Fluid capacity
4-speed models
8.6 qt. (8.1 L, 7.1 Imp. qt.)
5-speed models
9.3 qt. (8.8 L, 7.7 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Automatic transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS”
may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmis-
sion of your vehicle.
474
6-1. Specifications
Transfer (4WD models)
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N,
50 kgf) while the engine is running
*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 45 lbf (200 N, 21
kgf)
Steering
Oil capacity 0.48 qt. (0.45 L, 0.40 Imp.qt.)
Oil type Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Recommended oil viscosity
Above 0F (-18C): SAE 90
Below 0F (-18C): SAE 80W or SAE
80W-90
Pedal clearance*1Without third seats
3.7 in. (95 mm)
With third seats
4.7 in. (120 mm)
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel*26 8 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
475
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tires and wheels
Type A
*1: Steel wheels
*2: Aluminum wheels
Type B
Tire size 215/70R16 99H, 225/65R17 101H,
235/55R18 99H
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 16 6 1/2 J, 17 6 1/2 J*1, 17 7J*2, 18 7
1/2 J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size P235/55R18 99H
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 18 7 1/2 J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
476
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
A: HB3 halogen bulbs B: HB4 halogen bulbs
C: H11 halogen bulbs D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: Wedge base bulbs (amber) F: Double end bulbs
*: If equipped
Light Bulbs Bulb No. WType
Exterior
Headlights
High beam
Low beam
9005
9006
60
51
A
B
Front fog lights* 55 C
Front turn signal/parking, front
side marker lights 7443 21/5 D
Rear side marker 5D
Rear turn signal lights 7440 21 E
Back-up lights 921 16 D
License plate lights 168 5 D
Interior
Vanity lights 8D
Front personal lights 8D
Interior light 8F
Luggage compartment light 5F
477
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Toyota dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas-
oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed
a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
that is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emis-
sion levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and customer satisfaction through better performance.
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
478
6-1. Specifications
■Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or
keep clean intake systems.
■Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline
●Toyota allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygen-
ate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
●If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
●Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
479
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be
damaged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle's three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction and the
emission control system to function improperly.
●Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that
stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor
hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
480
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Tire size (P. 482)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 481)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 368)
Run-flat tire (RFT) or standard tire (P. 450)
This vehicle can be equipped with either run-flat tires (RFT) or standard
tires. A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall of the run-flat
tire.
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main-
tains the air pressure.
481
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 371)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 475)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Summer tire or all season tire (P. 371)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.
482
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
483
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
484
6-1. Specifications
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-
ing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passen-
ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
485
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
486
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight (distributed in accordance with
Tab le 1* below), and dividing by two
487
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
488
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
metrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima-
rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva-
tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul-
tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
489
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM
E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Tes t ri m
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
490
6-1. Specifications
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
491
6
Vehicle specifications
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
Smart key
system
(if equipped)
(P. 26 )
Smart key system On Off
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) On Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer) On Off
Wireless
remote con-
trol
(P. 38 )
Wireless remote control On Off
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Automatic door lock
function to be activated
if door is not opened
after being unlocked
On Off
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
60 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) On Off
Door lock buzzer On Off
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be
personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your
Toyota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer.
492
6-2. Customization
Wireless
remote con-
trol
(P. 38)
Operation signal
(Buzzer) On Off
Panic function On Off
Door lock
(P. 42,
455)
Unlocking using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 165)
Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5
Time elapsed before
headlights automati-
cally turn off after doors
are closed
30 seconds
0 second
60 seconds
90 seconds
Lights
(P. 165)
Daytime running light
system (U.S.A. only) On Off
Illumination
(P. 300)
Time elapsed before
lights turn off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked On Off
Vehicles with smart key
system: Operation after
the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned
OFF
Vehicles without smart
key system: Operation
after the engine switch
is turned to the “LOCK”
position
On Off
Front foot lights On Off
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
494
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Power window After reconnecting or changing the
battery P. 82
Moon roof
(if equipped)
After reconnecting or changing the
battery P. 85
Engine oil mainte-
nance data (U.S.A.
only)
After changing engine oil P. 425
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
in cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is
performed on the vehicle.
496
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
497
7
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
●Tendez la sangle diagonale de
sorte qu'elle couvre
complètement l'épaule, sans
entrer en contact avec le cou
ou glisser de l'épaule.
●Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
●Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calez-
vous bien dans le siège.
●Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
498
Entretien et soin
ATTENTION
■Lorsque vous utilisez la ceinture de sécurité du siège central de la
deuxième rangée
■Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont
pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas
desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle
ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune
garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
N'utilisez pas la ceinture de sécurité du
siège central de deuxième rangée si l'une
des 2 boucles est déverrouillée.
Si une seule des boucles est verrouillée,
ceci peut entraîner des blessures graves,
voire mortelles en cas de freinage
brusque ou de collision.
500
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
2WD 2 Wheel Drive
4WD 4 Wheel Drive
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACC Accessory
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
AUTO LSD Automatic Limited Slip Differential
AVG Average
CRS Child Restraint System
DAC Downhill Assist Control
DISP Display
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS Electric Power Steering
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M Emission Inspection and Maintenance
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M+S Mud and Snow
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD On Board Diagnostics
RFT Run-Flat Tire
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System
501
Abbreviation list
TRAC Traction control
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
502
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C.....................................220, 225
ABS ...........................................180
Active head restraints ...............53
Air conditioning filter...............382
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter..............382
Automatic air
conditioning system ............225
Manual air conditioning
system ................................220
Airbags
Airbag operating
conditions............................100
Airbag precautions for your
child ....................................104
Airbag warning light...............423
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions............................100
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .........................104
Front passenger occupant
classification system ...........110
General airbag
precautions .........................104
Locations of airbags ................97
Modification and disposal of
airbags ................................109
Proper driving
posture..........................95, 104
Side airbag operating
conditions ...........................100
Side airbag precautions ........104
SRS airbags............................97
Antenna ....................................242
Anti-lock brake system ...........180
Armrest ..................................... 320
Audio input............................... 262
Audio system
Antenna................................. 242
Audio input............................ 262
AUX adapter ......................... 262
CD player/changer................245
MP3/WMA disc .....................252
Optimal use...........................259
Portable music player ...........262
Radio..................................... 239
Steering wheel audio
switch.................................. 263
Type ...................................... 236
Automatic air
conditioning system .............225
Automatic light control
system .................................... 165
Automatic transmission.......... 150
AUX adapter ............................. 262
Auxiliary box ........................... 311
A
503
Alphabetical index
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 400
Wattage ................................ 476
Back door
Back door ............................... 46
Wireless remote control.......... 38
Smart key system................... 26
Battery
Checking .............................. 363
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ............. 457
Preparing and checking before
winter ................................. 206
Bluetooth............................... 270
Bottle holder............................ 309
Brakes
Fluid...................................... 361
Parking brake ....................... 154
Care
Exterior..................................332
Interior ...................................335
Seat belts ..............................336
Cargo capacity .........................204
Cargo hooks .............................323
CD changer...............................245
CD player ..................................245
Chains .......................................206
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition........116
Booster seats, installation .....120
Convertible seats,
definition .............................116
Convertible seats,
installation...........................120
Front passenger occupant
classification system ...........110
Infant seats, definition ...........116
Infant seats, installation.........120
Installing CRS with
LATCH anchors ..................122
Installing CRS with seat
belts ....................................124
Installing CRS with a top
tether strap..........................127
Child safety
Airbag precautions ................104
Battery precautions .......365, 459
Child restraint system............116
Child-protectors.......................44
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................73
Installing child restraints........120
Moon roof precautions ............87
B
C
504
Alphabetical index
Power window lock switch.......82
Power window precautions .....84
Removed key battery
precautions .........................386
Seat belt extender
precautions ...........................76
Seat belt precautions ..............74
Seat heater precautions........318
Child-protectors .........................44
Cleaning
Exterior..................................332
Interior ...................................335
Seat belts ..............................336
Clock .........................................314
Condenser ................................361
Console box .............................306
Cooling system
Engine overheating ...............460
Cruise control...........................172
Cup holders..............................308
Curtain shield airbags ...............97
Customizable features.............491
Daytime running light
system ....................................166
Defogger
Rear window .........................233
Side mirrors...........................233
Dimensions...............................466
Dinghy towing.......................... 218
Display
Trip information ..................... 162
Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 344
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights .............. 300
Wattage................................. 476
Doors
Door glasses ...........................82
Door lock.....................26, 38, 42
Side mirrors............................. 80
Downhill assist control
system .................................... 189
Driver's seat belt reminder
light.........................................425
Driving
Break-in tips.......................... 135
Correct posture .......................95
Procedures............................134
Winter driving tips ................. 206
Electric power steering ........... 180
Electronic key
If your electronic key
battery is discharged ..........455
Emergency flasher switch ......410
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer
sounds... ............................422
If a warning light turns
on........................................ 422
D
E
505
Alphabetical index
If the electronic key does not
operate properly................. 455
If the engine will not start...... 451
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted ................................ 453
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ............. 457
If you have a flat tire ............ 434
If you lose your keys............. 454
If you think something is
wrong ................................. 418
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 463
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ................................. 411
If your vehicle overheats ...... 460
Switch................................... 155
Engine
Compartment........................ 352
Engine switch ............... 143, 147
Hood..................................... 348
How to start the
engine ........................ 143, 147
Identification number............ 468
If the engine will not start ......451
Ignition switch................143, 147
Overheating...........................460
Engine compartment cover.....354
Engine coolant
Capacity ................................472
Checking ...............................360
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................206
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ......................................156
Engine immobilizer system.......92
Engine oil
Capacity ................................470
Checking ...............................355
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................206
Engine oil maintenance
data .........................................358
Enhanced vehicle stability
control ....................................180
Enhanced VSC .........................180
EPS............................................180
Event data recorder .................420
Floor mat...................................322
Fluid
Brake.....................................361
Washer..................................367
F
506
Alphabetical index
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Switch....................................168
Wattage.................................476
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Switch....................................168
Wattage.................................476
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............110
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light.........................425
Front seats
Adjustment ..............................49
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Switch....................................165
Wattage.................................476
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Wattage.................................476
Fuel
Capacity ................................470
Fuel gauge ............................156
Fuel pump shut off system....419
Gas station information .........516
Information ............................ 477
Refueling................................. 88
Type ...................................... 470
Fuel door .................................... 88
Fuel filler door............................ 88
Fuel pump shut off system .....419
Fuses ........................................ 388
Gas station information ..........516
Gauges...................................... 156
Glove box ................................. 305
Grocery bag hooks ..................323
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)................266
Hazard light switch..................410
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................ 65
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs............. 400
Switch ...................................165
Wattage................................. 476
Heaters
Seat heaters.......................... 318
Side mirrors........................... 233
Hood..........................................348
Hooks
Cargo hook ...........................323
Grocery bag ..........................323
Horn .......................................... 155
G
H
507
Alphabetical index
I/M test...................................... 343
Identification
Engine .................................. 468
Vehicle.................................. 468
Ignition switch ................. 144, 147
Illuminated entry system........ 300
Indicator lights ........................ 159
Initialization
Items to initialize................... 494
Inside rear view mirror.............. 78
Interior lights
Interior lights......................... 300
Switch........................... 302, 301
Wattage ................................ 476
Jack
Positioning a floor jack ......... 350
Vehicle-equipped jack .......... 434
Jack handle.............................. 434
Keyless entry............................. 38
Keys
Electronic key ......................... 24
Engine switch ............... 144, 147
If the electronic key does not
operate properly................. 455
If you lose your keys/
wireless remote control
transmitter.......................... 454
Ignition switch............... 144, 147
Key number.............................24
Keyless entry...........................38
Keys ........................................24
Mechanical key .......................24
Wireless remote control
key ........................................38
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Wattage.................................476
Light bulbs
Replacing ..............................400
Wattage.................................476
Lights
Door courtesy lights ..............300
Emergency flasher switch .....410
Fog light switch .....................168
Hazard light switch ................410
Headlight switch....................165
Interior light switch ........301, 302
Luggage compartment light...302
Personal light switch .............301
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Turn signal lever....................153
Vanity lights...........................313
Wattage.................................476
Load capacity...........................204
Lock steering column......145, 148
Luggage cover .........................325
I
J
K
L
508
Alphabetical index
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance .......................344
General maintenance............340
Maintenance data..................466
Maintenance requirements....338
Manual air conditioning
system ....................................220
Meter
Instrument panel light
control .................................157
Meters ...................................156
Micro dust and pollen filter.....229
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror.............78
Side mirror heaters................233
Side mirrors.............................80
Vanity mirrors........................313
Moon roof ...................................85
MP3 disc ...................................252
Noise from under vehicle ..........18
Odometer ..................................156
Oil
Engine oil ..............................355
Opener
Hood......................................348
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding............... 80
Outside temperature
display .................................... 163
Overhead console.................... 307
Overheating, Engine................460
Parking brake...........................154
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 400
Switch ...................................165
Wattage................................. 476
Personal/interior lights
Switch ...................................301
Wattage................................. 476
Power outlet ............................. 315
Power windows..........................82
M
N
O
P
509
Alphabetical index
Radiator.................................... 361
Radio ........................................ 239
Rear seat
Adjustment ............................. 54
Folding down second
seatback............................... 57
Folding down third
seatback............................... 59
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 400
Wattage ................................ 476
Rear view monitor system...... 175
Rear window defogger............ 233
Rear window wiper.................. 171
Replacing
Fuses.................................... 388
Key battery ........................... 384
Light bulbs ............................ 400
Tires ..................................... 434
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners ........................... 496
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt ............ 68
Automatic Locking
Retractor .............................. 71
Child restraint system
installation .......................... 120
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts...................... 336
Emergency Locking
Retractor ...............................71
How to wear your seat belt......68
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................73
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use .................................72
Reminder light .......................425
Seat belt extenders .................73
Seat belt pretensioners ...........71
Seat heaters..............................318
Seating capacity.......................204
Seats
Adjustment ........................49, 54
Adjustment precaution ......53, 62
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ..............120
Cleaning ................................335
Head restraints........................65
Properly sitting in the seat.......95
Seat heaters..........................318
Service reminder
indicators ..............................159
Shift lever
Automatic transmission .........150
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P.................453
Shift lock system .....................453
Side airbags................................97
R
S
510
Alphabetical index
Side marker lights
Replacing ..............................400
Switch....................................165
Wattage.................................476
Side mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............80
Smart key system
Entry function ..........................26
Starting the engine ................143
Spare tire
Inflation pressure...................475
Storage location ....................434
Spark plug ................................472
Specifications...........................466
Speech command switch........271
Speedometer ............................156
Steering
Column lock release......145, 148
Steering wheel
Adjustment ..............................77
Audio switches ......................263
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs .............400
Wattage.................................476
Storage feature.........................304
Storage precautions ................201
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................463
Sun visors ................................312
Switch
Emergency flasher switch.....410
Engine switch................144, 147
Fog light switch .....................168
Hazard light switch................ 410
Ignition switch ...............144, 147
Light switches .......................165
Power door lock switch ........... 43
Power window switches ..........82
Window lock switch.................82
Wiper and washer
switch..........................169, 171
Tachometer .............................. 156
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs............. 400
Switch ...................................165
Wattage................................. 476
Talk switch ...............................271
Telephone switch..................... 271
Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system .....92
Theft prevention labels .............94
Tire inflation pressure .............375
Tire information
Glossary................................485
Size ....................................... 482
Tire identification number......481
Uniform tire quality
grading................................ 483
T
511
Alphabetical index
Tires
Chains .................................. 206
Checking .............................. 368
If you have a flat tire ............. 434
Inflation pressure.................. 375
Information ........................... 480
Replacing ............................. 434
Rotating tires ........................ 368
Size ...................................... 475
Snow tires............................. 206
Tire pressure warning
system........................ 368, 425
Tools......................................... 434
Total load capacity.................. 204
Towing
Dinghy towing....................... 218
Emergency towing................ 411
Trailer towing........................ 210
Traction control....................... 180
TRAC ........................................ 180
Trip information....................... 162
Trip meter................................. 156
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 400
Switch................................... 153
Wattage ................................ 476
Utility vehicle........................... 193
Valet key .....................................24
Vanity lights
Vanity lights...........................313
Wattage.................................476
Vanity mirrors...........................313
Vehicle identification
number ...................................468
Warning buzzers
Brake system ........................422
Open door .............................425
Seat belt reminder.................425
Warning lights
Active torque control 4WD
system ........................423, 425
Anti-lock brake system ..........423
Automatic transmission fluid
temperature ........................425
Brake assist system ..............423
Brake system ........................422
Charging system ...................423
Electric power steering
system ................................423
Engine oil pressure ...............423
Low fuel level ........................425
Low washer fluid ...................425
Malfunction indicator lamp ....423
Open door .............................425
Pretensioners ........................423
Seat belt reminder light .........425
SRS airbags ..........................423
Tire pressure warning light....425
U
V
W
512
Alphabetical index
Washer
Checking ...............................367
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................206
Switch............................169, 171
Washing and waxing ...............332
Weight
Cargo capacity ......................198
Load limits .............................204
Weight ...................................466
Wheels ......................................380
Window glasses ........................82
Window lock switch...................82
Windows
Power windows .......................82
Rear window defogger ..........233
Washer..........................169, 171
Windshield wiper de-icer.........235
Windshield wipers ...................169
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery ............384
Wireless remote control key....38
WMA disc..................................252
513
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 434 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 451 If the engine will not start
P. 9 2 Engine immobilizer system
P. 457 If the battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 453
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 460 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 454 If you lose your keys/ wireless
remote control transmitter
514
What to do if...
The battery runs out
P. 457 If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 4 2 Side doors
P. 4 6 Back door
The vehicle is stuck in
mud or sand
P. 463 If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator light
comes on
P. 422 If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds...
515
What to do if...
■Warning lights
P. 423
or
P. 4 2 2 P. 423
P. 4 2 3 P. 425
P. 4 2 3 P. 425
P. 425
or
P. 4 2 3 P. 425
P. 4 2 3 P. 425
P. 4 2 5 P. 425
P. 425
or
P. 4 2 3 P. 427
Brake system warning
light
Electric power steering
warning light
Active torque control 4WD sys-
tem warning light
Charging system warn-
ing light
Low fuel level warning
light
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Engine oil replacement
reminder light
SRS warning light
Low washer fluid warn-
ing light
Open door warning light
Automatic transmission fluid temper-
ature warning light
ABS warning light
Tire pressure warning
light
Smart key system warn-
ing light
516
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 348
Fuel filler door
P. 8 8
Hood release lever
P. 3 4 8
Fuel filler door opener
P. 8 8
Tire inflation pressure
P. 475
Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 15.9 gal. (60 L, 13.2 lmp.gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating
of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)
Cold tire inflation
pressure P. 4 7 5
Engine oil capacity
Drain and refill
(Reference)
P. 470
Engine oil type
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: P. 470
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 (2.5 L 4-cylinder
[2AR-FE] engine) SAE 5W-30 (3.5 L V6
[2GR-FE] engine)
